Sie sind auf Seite 1von 318

User Guide

®
Your Palm Treo 750 Smartphone

Intellectual property notices may arise through the use of this software. Palm Inc. and its suppliers
assume no responsibility for any damage or loss caused by deletion
© 2006 Palm Inc. All rights reserved. Palm, Treo, and the Palm and
of data as a result of malfunction, dead battery, or repairs. Be sure to
Treo logos are among the trademarks or registered trademarks
make backup copies of all important data on other media to protect
owned by or licensed to Palm Inc. All other brand and product names
against data loss.
are or may be trademarks of, and are used to identify products or
services of, their respective owners.
End user notice
The Treo trademark is used by Palm Inc. in Sweden and Denmark
Microsoft® Voice Command Version 1.5 for Windows Mobile®
with the express consent of Pfizer and its affiliated companies. The
products marketed and/or sold by Palm Inc. under the Treo trademark
NOTE The Voice Command application is not available in all
are in no way affiliated with Pfizer or its business.
languages. See Setting up voice commands .
This product is protected by one or more of the following United
States patents: IMPORTANT Do not become distracted from driving safely if
operating a motor vehicle while using Device Software.
7,007,239; 6,976,226; 6,975,304; 6,965,375; 6,961,567; 6,961,029;
6,957,397; 6,952,571; 6,950,988; 6,947,975; 6,947,017; 6,943,667;
Operating certain parts of this Device requires user attention.
6,940,490; 6,924,752; 6,907,233; 6,906,701; 6,906,741; 6,901,276;
Diverting attention away from the road while driving can possibly
6,850,780; 6,845,408; 6,842,628; 6,842,335; 6,831,662; 6,819,552;
cause an accident or other serious consequences. Even occasional,
6,804,699; 6,795,710; 6,788,285; 6,781,824; 6,781,575; 6,766,490;
short diversions of attention can be dangerous if your attention is
6,745,047; 6,744,451; 6,738,852; 6,732,105; 6,724,720; 6,721,892;
diverted away from your driving task at a critical time. Do not change
6,712,638; 6,708,280; 6,697,639; 6,687,839; 6,685,328; 6,665,803;
system settings or enter data non-verbally (using your hands) while
6,618,044; 6,590,588; 6,539,476; 6,532,148;6,523,124; 6,519,141;
driving. Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before attempting
6,516,202; 6,490,155; 6,480,146; 6,457,134; 6,456,247; 6,442,637;
these operations. This is important since while setting up or changing
6,441,824; 6,437,543; 6,429,625; 6,425,087; 6,389,572; 6,388,877;
some functions you might be required to distract your attention away
6,381,650; 6,363,082; 6,344,848; 6,317,085; 6,241,537; 6,222,857;
from the road and remove your hands from the wheel.
6,185,423; 6,147,314; 6,115,248; 6,064,342; D421,251; D429,252;
D466,128; D478,091. Patent pending. Microsoft makes no representations, warranties, or other
determinations that ANY use of the Software Product is legal, safe, or
This product also is licensed under United States patent 6,058,304.
in any manner recommended or intended while driving or otherwise
MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology is licensed from Fraunhofer operating a motor vehicle.
IIS and Thomson. Palm, Inc. is an authorized licensee of the
MultiMediaCard trademark. This product is protected by certain General Operation
intellectual property rights of Microsoft Corporation. Use or
Voice Command Control: Many of the functions of the Device
distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited
Software can be accomplished using only voice commands. Using
without a license from Microsoft or an authorized Microsoft
voice commands while driving allows you to initiate the command
subsidiary. All rights reserved.
with a button and then operate the Device mostly without removing
your hands from the wheel.
Disclaimer and limitation of liability
Prolonged Views of Screen: If you are driving, do not access any
Palm Inc. and its suppliers assume no responsibility for any damage
function requiring a prolonged view of the screen. Pull over in a safe
or loss resulting from the use of this guide. Palm Inc. and its suppliers
and legal manner before attempting to access a function of the
assume no responsibility for any loss or claims by third parties that
system requiring prolonged attention. Even occasional short scans to
the screen may be hazardous if your attention has been diverted conditions and existing traffic regulations. The Device Software is not
away from your driving task at a critical time. a substitute for your personal judgment.

Volume Setting: Do not raise the volume excessively. Keep the Use of Speech Recognition Functions: Speech recognition
volume at a level where you can still hear outside traffic and software is inherently a statistical process which is subject to errors.
emergency signals while driving. Driving while unable to hear these It is your responsibility to monitor the speech recognition functions
sounds could cause an accident. and address any errors.

Let Your Judgment Prevail: The Device Software is only an aid. PN: 406-10964-01
Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local v 1.0
Contents
Welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
What’s in the box? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
What do I need to get started? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Chapter 1: Setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Palm Treo 750 smartphone overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Inserting the SIM card and battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Charging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Making your first call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Setting up synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Chapter 2: Moving around on your Palm® Treo™ 750 smartphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Navigating around the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Using the keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Opening and closing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Using your Today screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Chapter 3: Your phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Turning your Palm® Treo™ 750 smartphone on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Making calls from the Today screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Other ways of making calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Receiving calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Using voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
What can I do during a call? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Defining speed-dial buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Using a phone headset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Customizing phone settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
What are all those icons? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

CONTENTS v
Chapter 4: Synchronizing information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Synchronization overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
How do I synchronize? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
What can I synchronize? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Setting up your computer for synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Synchronizing using the sync cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Setting up wireless synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Other ways to synchronize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Setting synchronization options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Chapter 5: Your email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Setting up email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Sending and receiving messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Working with email messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Sending email messages from within another application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Chapter 6: Your text and multimedia messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Using the Messaging application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Customizing the Messaging application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Using Pocket MSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Chapter 7: Your connections to the web and wireless devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Browsing the web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Connecting to devices with Bluetooth® wireless technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Using your device as a wireless modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Chapter 8: Your photos, videos, and music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Pictures & Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Windows Media Player Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

vi CONTENTS
Chapter 9: Your personal information organizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Chapter 10: Your Microsoft Office tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Synchronizing your Microsoft Office files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Word Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
PowerPoint Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Excel Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Chapter 11: Your application and info management tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Finding information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Installing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Removing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Sharing information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Beaming information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Using expansion cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Chapter 12: Your personal settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Today screen settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
System sound settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Display and appearance settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Application settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Locking your smartphone and info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Connection settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

CONTENTS vii
Chapter 13: Common questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Transferring info from another device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Reinstalling the desktop software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Resetting your smartphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Network connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Third-party applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Making room on your smartphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Voice quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Where to learn more . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Regulatory information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

viii CONTENTS
Welcome but also high-speed data service from your
wireless service provider. You may also
need high-speed data service to send and
Congratulations on the purchase of your receive multimedia messages. Data
Palm® Treo™ 750 smartphone. In one speeds vary based on network availability
compact and indispensable device, you and capacity.
now have all of the following:
• An advanced wireless smartphone TIPLOOK HERE: Don’t miss the helpful tips
• A Windows Mobile organizer with
® and cross-references given in these boxes.
portable expansion capability (miniSD)
• High-speed data with GPRS/EDGE and
UMTS/HSDPA support What’s in the box?
• A 1.3-megapixel digital camera
• Support for numerous mobile email You should have received all of the
solutions following items in the smartphone box:
• Text and multimedia messaging
Hardware
• Windows Media Player Mobile
®

• Treo 750 smartphone


• Microsoft Office Mobile suite
®

• Rechargeable battery (1200 mAh)


This guide will help you set up your
smartphone and quickly learn to use it. • AC charger (with international adapters
in some smartphone packages)
NOTE If you want to use your phone and
• USB sync cable
send and receive text messages, you need
a service contract with your wireless • Stereo headset
service provider. If you also want to • Screen protector
browse the web and send and receive NOTE In some smartphone packages, the
email, you need not only a service contract screen protector may already be applied to

WHAT’S IN THE BOX? 1


your smartphone screen. Your package
may also contain an extra screen protector.
What do I need to
get started?
TIP Visit www.palm.com to purchase a
replacement screen protector if the original As you work through the instructions in this
one becomes scratched or worn. guide, you need all the items that came in
the smartphone box (see What’s in the
Documentation and software box?), as well as the following:
• Read This First setup poster • You must have an activated wireless
• Treo 750 Smartphone Quick Reference account (using a SIM card from your
• Windows Mobile Getting Started Disc, wireless service provider) with data
which includes the following: services.
• ActiveSync desktop synchronization
® • If you plan to synchronize personal
software information between your smartphone
and a computer, you need access to
• Windows Media Player 10
®

that computer during setup.


• Additional software for your
• You must also have your smartphone
smartphone
within range of your wireless service
• User Guide (this guide) provider’s cellular coverage.
• Palm warranty
• End User License Agreement

2 WHAT DO I NEED TO GET STARTED?


CHAP TE R

Setting up
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Palm® Treo™ 750
smartphone. You’re about to discover the many things about
your smartphone that will help you better manage your life and
have fun, too.
As you become more familiar with your smartphone, you’ll
want to personalize the settings and add applications to make it
uniquely yours. But first, follow these few easy steps to set up
your smartphone and get it running.

Benefits
• Know where your smartphone • Start using your smartphone right
controls are located away
In this chapter
Palm Treo 750 smartphone overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Inserting the SIM card and battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Charging the battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Making your first call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Setting up synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
SETTING UP 1

CHAPTER
Palm Treo 750 smartphone overview
Front view

Earpiece
Indicator light (phone 5-way navigator
and charge indicator) with Center button
Right action key

OK

Power/End

Volume

Side button

Left action
key
Start
Microphone
Phone/Send

Multi-connector

Headset jack

PALM TREO 750 SMARTPHONE OVERVIEW 5


1
CHAPTER SETTING UP

Be careful not to scratch or crush your


TIP DID YOU KNOW? By default, pressing the Side
smartphone screen. Do not store it in a place button opens the Windows Media® Player
where other items might damage it. Mobile application (see Windows Media
Player Mobile). You can change the function of
the Side button (see Reassigning buttons).

IMPORTANT The smartphone speaker


includes a large magnet, so be sure not to
store your smartphone near credit cards or
other items that could be demagnetized.

Back view

Self-portrait mirror Speaker

Camera lens

Infrared (IR)
port Battery door
release
Expansion card
slot
Reset button
(located inside
expansion card
slot door)

6 PALM TREO 750 SMARTPHONE OVERVIEW


SETTING UP 1

CHAPTER
Top view

Stylus

Ringer switch

features, you need to insert a SIM card. If a


DID YOU KNOW? The Ringer switch silences all SIM card is not included in your
sounds, including music, at once; you don’t
smartphone box, your wireless service
need to hunt for “off” or “mute” settings in
provider will provide you with one.
individual applications.

TIPIf you don’t have a SIM card, contact your

Inserting the SIM wireless service provider.

card and battery


Your SIM card contains account
information such as your phone number
and voicemail access number. To use your
smartphone’s phone, email, or web

INSERTING THE SIM CARD AND BATTERY 7


1
CHAPTER SETTING UP

1 Use one hand to press the Battery Notch


door release, and use your other hand
to slide the battery door downward to
remove it from your smartphone.

Battery door
release

4 Align the metal contacts on the battery


with the contacts inside the battery
compartment, insert the battery into the
compartment at a 45-degree angle, and
then press it into place.
2 If the battery is installed, remove it.
Slide your finger under the left side of Battery
the battery (nearest the stylus) and lift contacts
up to remove. Phone
contacts
3 With the metal contacts facing the
battery compartment, slide the SIM
card into the cutout in the lower-right
corner of the compartment until you
feel it snap into place. Align the notches
to make sure you have the card oriented
correctly.
5 Slide the battery door back into place.
Your smartphone screen turns on.
Wait for the progress bar to fill and the
Windows Mobile screen to appear.
®

8 INSERTING THE SIM CARD AND BATTERY


SETTING UP 1

CHAPTER
TIP If your smartphone does not turn on after Charging the battery
you insert the battery, you need to connect it
to the AC charger to charge it (see Charging
Although the battery may come with a
the battery). If it still doesn’t start, perform a
soft reset (see Performing a soft reset). sufficient charge to complete the setup
process, we recommend that after setup
you charge your smartphone for three
6 Follow the onscreen instructions to
hours (or until the indicator light is solid
finish the installation.
green) to give it a full charge. See
7 If your SIM card is not already activated, Maximizing battery life for tips on making
follow the activation steps provided by your battery’s power last longer.
your wireless service provider, or
contact your wireless service provider BEFORE YOU BEGIN Make sure the
directly for assistance. If you plan to use battery is inserted before you charge. If you
email and web browsing, you need connect your smartphone to a power
high-speed data service from your source without the battery inserted,
wireless service provider in addition to nothing happens.
your service contract. You may also
need high-speed data service to send 1 If international adapters are included in
and receive multimedia messages. your smartphone package, prepare the
AC charger by inserting the adapter that
TIPYou can buy an extra battery as a spare for fits the wall outlet you’re going to use.
long airplane trips or periods of heavy data 2 Plug the AC charger into a wall outlet.
use. To ensure proper functioning, be sure to
3 With the arrow on the connector facing
use batteries from Palm only. Visit
www.palm.com.
up (toward your smartphone screen),
connect the charger cable to the bottom
of your smartphone.

CHARGING THE BATTERY 9


1
CHAPTER SETTING UP

the onscreen battery icon displays the


charging status:
A solid lightning bolt indicates that
the battery is connected to a wall
outlet and is charging.
Indicator light
A shaded lightning bolt indicates
that the battery is connected to a
wall outlet and is fully charged.
A partial battery without a lightning
bolt indicates that the battery is not
connected to a wall outlet and that
it has some power.
An exclamation point (!) indicates
4 Check the indicator light to confirm that that the battery needs to be
your smartphone is being charged. charged immediately.
• Solid red indicates that your
smartphone is being charged.
• Solid green indicates that your Battery
smartphone is fully charged. icon

DID YOU KNOW? If the battery is low, the


indicator light flashes red.

When your smartphone is on (see Turning


your Palm® Treo™ 750 smartphone on/off),

10 CHARGING THE BATTERY


SETTING UP 1

CHAPTER
power than the organizer features.
DID YOU KNOW? If your battery ever becomes If you don’t plan to use the wireless
fully drained, your info remains safely stored
features on your smartphone for a
on your smartphone. Recharge the battery to
while, turn off your wireless services
access your info.
(see Turning wireless services on/off).
You can forward calls to a different
Maximizing battery life number or let all calls be picked up by
Battery life depends on how you use your voicemail (see Forwarding calls). To see
smartphone. You can maximize the life of if your wireless services are on, tap the
your battery by following a few easy phone-off icon, and then select
guidelines: Wireless Manager.
• Charge your smartphone whenever
DID YOU KNOW? You can also see if your
you’re at your desk, or charge
wireless services are on by pressing Menu
it overnight each day. The battery in your (right action key) and selecting Wireless
smartphone has a much longer useful Manager.
life if you charge it frequently instead of
waiting until it’s fully drained.
• If you are synchronizing email and other
• If you spend a lot of time using the information directly with your corporate
camera, games, media players Exchange Server using Microsoft
(including listening to music with Exchange ActiveSync®, set the
wireless headphones using the built-in synchronization interval to a maximum
Bluetooth® wireless technology), or of every 15 minutes during peak times
other applications, keep an eye on the and every hour (or turned off
battery icon and charge when completely) during non-peak times (see
necessary. Setting the synchronization schedule).
• The wireless features (phone, email, • Turn off the Bluetooth feature when you
messaging, and web) on your do not need to make a Bluetooth
smartphone generally consume more

CHARGING THE BATTERY 11


1
CHAPTER SETTING UP

connection (see Entering basic


Bluetooth settings).
Making your first call
• Turn the voice command feature off
(see Setting up voice commands).
• As with any mobile phone, if you are in
an area with no wireless coverage, your
smartphone searches for a signal, which
consumes power. If you cannot move to
an area of better coverage, temporarily
turn off your phone (see Turning your
Palm® Treo™ 750 smartphone on/off).
• Turn down the screen brightness (see
Adjusting the brightness).
• Set your screen to turn off automatically 1 Press Phone/Send to display your
after a shorter period of inactivity (see Today screen.
Optimizing power settings).
TIP You can also press Power/End to display
• Turn off the option to receive beamed
your Today screen, unless you are on a call. If
information (see Beaming an entry or you’re on a call, pressing Power/End hangs up
file). the call.
• Keep your battery away from direct
sunlight and other sources of heat. 2 If prompted, press Center to turn
Temperatures over 50 degrees Celsius off Keyguard (see Locking your
(120 degrees Fahrenheit) can keyboard (Keyguard) for more info).
permanently reduce the capacity and
3 Use the number pad on the keyboard to
life span of any lithium-ion battery.
enter the number you want to call.

12 MAKING YOUR FIRST CALL


SETTING UP 1

CHAPTER
TIP The Dial Lookup list might appear while
you are dialing a number. Continue entering
numbers to place the call. For more info on
the Dial Lookup list, see Dialing by contact
name.

4 Press Phone/Send to dial.


5 When your call is complete, press
Power/End to end the call. Volume
button

What’s my number?
1 Make sure your phone is on (see
Turning your Palm® Treo™ 750
smartphone on/off).
2 If you do not see your Today screen,
press Phone/Send .
3 Press Menu (right action key).

Adjusting call volume 4 Select Preferences > Phone Settings.

While a call is in progress, press the 5 On the Phone tab, look for your phone
Volume button on the side of your number below the title bar.
smartphone to adjust the call volume.

MAKING YOUR FIRST CALL 13


1
CHAPTER SETTING UP

Look here for your


phone number
Setting up
synchronization
After you’ve finished setting up your
smartphone, we recommend that you set
up a synchronization method to get the
most out of your smartphone.
Synchronization allows you to enter or
change information on your smartphone or
in Microsoft Office Outlook on your
®

computer; your info is then automatically


updated in both places— there is no need
6 Press OK .
to enter the info twice (see Synchronizing
information).
TIP If your phone number doesn’t appear on
the Phone Settings screen, your network has
not yet sent the number to the SIM card (this
does not affect SIM card functionality). Turn
your phone off, wait a few hours, and then
turn on your phone and repeat these steps. If
your phone number still does not appear,
please contact your wireless service provider
for assistance.

14 SETTING UP SYNCHRONIZATION
CHAP TE R

2
®
Moving around on your Palm

Treo 750 smartphone
Have you ever been to a new city and felt a bit lost until you
figured out the streets? Learning to move around on your
Palm® Treo™ 750 smartphone is similar. Most applications that
work on your smartphone use the same set of controls. So
once you learn how to use these controls, you’ll be driving all
over town and you won’t even need a map.

Benefits
• Quickly move around and • Access extra features with menus
complete tasks in applications • Find and open applications quickly
using one thumb on the 5-way
navigator
In this chapter
Navigating around the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Using the keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Opening and closing applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Using your Today screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
MOVING AROUND ON YOUR PALM® TREO™ 750 SMARTPHONE 2

CHAPTER
Navigating around screen. Press Center
select items.
to highlight and

the screen
TIPSome third-party applications may not
work with the 5-way navigator, and you must
To navigate around the smartphone screen, use the stylus instead.
you can use the 5-way navigator or you can DID YOU KNOW? Custom navigation features
tap items on the screen with the stylus. As are available when you browse the web using
you become familiar with your Internet Explorer (see Viewing a web page).
smartphone, you’ll find your own favorite TIP The arrow icons that indicate directions on
way to scroll, highlight, and select items. the 5-way are different from the onscreen
Using the 5-way, press Right , Left , scroll arrows and the arrows that indicate that
a list is available (see Selecting options in a
Up , or Down to move around the
list).

Center Up

Left Right

Down

NAVIGATING AROUND THE SCREEN 17


2
CHAPTER MOVING AROUND ON YOUR PALM® TREO™ 750 SMARTPHONE

Scrolling through screens


TIP When you are using applications such as
As on a computer, on your smartphone you Inbox, Internet Explorer Mobile, and Word
scroll to move from field to field or page to Mobile, press and hold Option while pressing
page, or in some cases to highlight an item Left or Right on the 5-way to automatically go
or option in a list. There are several to the top and bottom of a screen.
methods of scrolling:
• Press the 5-way on the front of your • When viewing a screen with tabs, such
smartphone. Press Right , Left , Up as when adding a contact, press
, or Down to move to the next Down to scroll to the tabs, and then
field, button, or action in that direction. press Left or Right to move
between tabs.
• Press and hold Option while
pressing Up or Down to scroll • When inside a text field, press Right
one screen at a time. These keys work or Left to move to the next character,
just like the Page Up and Page Down and press Up or Down to move
keys on your computer keyboard. between lines.
• When inside a list, press and hold
TIPCan’t find the Option key? See Using the Up or Down to rapidly scroll
keyboard. through the list.

• Press and hold Option while


pressing Left or Right to jump to
the top or bottom of the current
document or entry.

18 NAVIGATING AROUND THE SCREEN


MOVING AROUND ON YOUR PALM® TREO™ 750 SMARTPHONE 2

CHAPTER
• Tap an onscreen scroll arrow. buttons are not accessible using the
5-way.
Scroll arrows
Highlighting and selecting items
On most screens, one item—a button, a
list entry, or a check box—is highlighted by
default. The highlight identifies which item
Scroll bar is affected by your next action. Use the
with slider 5-way to move the highlight from one item
to another before opening or selecting it.

TIP The best way to learn to use the 5-way is


to experiment. Press the 5-way buttons, and
as you do, follow the movement of the border
Scroll arrows
around the screen. The behavior of the 5-way
• Tap and drag the slider of an onscreen varies slightly in each application.
scroll bar.
The highlight can take one of two forms,
Closing screens depending on what is highlighted:
To accept the information you entered on a • Border: This rectangular border
screen and to return to the previous highlights items such as an onscreen
screen—or to return to the previous screen button (such as OK, Dismiss, or Hide), a
without making any changes—do one of check box, an option, or a web link.
the following:
• Press OK .
• Use the stylus to tap or in the
upper-right corner of the screen. These

NAVIGATING AROUND THE SCREEN 19


2
CHAPTER MOVING AROUND ON YOUR PALM® TREO™ 750 SMARTPHONE

• Reverse type (light text on a dark vary from application to application and
background): This highlights items from screen to screen. Look on the screen
such as a phone number, an email directly above the action key to see the
address, text, or an item in a list. action that it takes in the current context.
In some contexts, these keys may do
nothing at all. In most cases the right
action key opens the menu, and the
left action key activates a specific
command, such as New or Edit.
After highlighting an item with the 5-way, Remember that action key functions vary
you can select or activate it by pressing from screen to screen, so be sure to check
Center or by tapping the item with the the onscreen label before pressing the
stylus. action keys.

Highlighting text
You can use the stylus to highlight text on
the screen. Tap and drag the stylus across
the text you want to highlight. To highlight
a word, double-tap it. To highlight a
paragraph, triple-tap it.

TIPWhen text is highlighted, you can press


Backspace to delete the highlighted text.

Using the action keys


The left and right action keys give you quick
access to tasks that you can do on the
current screen, so the action key items

20 NAVIGATING AROUND THE SCREEN


MOVING AROUND ON YOUR PALM® TREO™ 750 SMARTPHONE 2

CHAPTER
Left action key Right action key
activates this activates this
command command
Left action key Right action key

Selecting menu items


In many applications, a menu provides
access to additional features. The menu is
hidden until you press Menu (right
action key). To get the most out of your
smartphone, it’s a good idea to familiarize
yourself with the additional features
available through the menu in various
applications.
1 Press Menu (right action key) to
display an application’s menu. 2 Press Up or Down to highlight a
menu item.

NAVIGATING AROUND THE SCREEN 21


2
CHAPTER MOVING AROUND ON YOUR PALM® TREO™ 750 SMARTPHONE

3 If an arrow appears next to a menu


item, press Center or Right to
display additional options for that item,
and then press Up or Down to
highlight a menu item. To return to the
main menu without making a selection,
press Left .
4 Press Center to select the menu
item, or press Left or Menu
(right action key) to close the menu and
cancel your selection. 2 Press and hold Center to open the
shortcut menu.
DID YOU KNOW? You can select most menu
items by pressing a key on the keyboard. To TIP You can also tap and hold the stylus on an
quickly access a menu item, press Menu item to open the shortcut menu.
(right action key) followed by the underlined
letter in the menu item’s name.
3 Press Up or Down to highlight a
menu item.
Selecting options in a shortcut menu
4 Press Center to select the menu
Most applications also provide access to item, or press Left to cancel your
context-sensitive shortcut menus—similar selection.
to the right-click menus on a computer. The
shortcut menu options vary based on the Selecting options in a list
highlighted selection.
Lists enable you to select from a range of
1 Highlight the item whose shortcut options. You can identify whether a list is
menu you want to see. available when you select the field. If a
rectangle appears around the field along
with a downward-pointing arrow, a list is

22 NAVIGATING AROUND THE SCREEN


MOVING AROUND ON YOUR PALM® TREO™ 750 SMARTPHONE 2

CHAPTER
available. Lists are different from the To select from a list, do any of the
menus described earlier in this section. following:
• Use the 5-way to highlight the field, and
then press Center to display the
items in the list. Press Up or
Down to highlight the item you want,
and then press Center to make
your selection.
• Use your stylus to tap the arrow, and
then tap the item in the list.

DID YOU KNOW? In fields where you see a


downward-pointing arrow but no rectangle,
you must tap the arrow with the stylus to
display the list.

• To exit the list and cancel your selection,


press Left .

TIP When selecting fields you might not see


the downward-pointing arrow until you press
Center on the 5-way.

NAVIGATING AROUND THE SCREEN 23


2
CHAPTER MOVING AROUND ON YOUR PALM® TREO™ 750 SMARTPHONE

Using the keyboard


Left Right
action key action key
Phone/Send Power/End
Start OK

Backspace

Option Return

Shift/Search Shift

Space Alt

Understanding the keyboard backlight


DID YOU KNOW? You can also use the onscreen
keyboard to enter letters, numbers, and other
Your smartphone includes a keyboard
characters in applications that support this backlight for low light conditions. The
feature. Tap the keyboard icon in the center at keyboard backlight activates automatically
the bottom of any screen where it appears. when the screen turns on. The backlight
After opening the keyboard, you can set turns off automatically when the screen
various input options by tapping the arrow to turns off or when you are on a call or
the right of the keyboard icon. playing music in the background for longer
than the time specified in Backlight
Settings. You can set different time
intervals depending on whether the
smartphone is operating on battery power

24 USING THE KEYBOARD


MOVING AROUND ON YOUR PALM® TREO™ 750 SMARTPHONE 2

CHAPTER
or is connected to an external power
source. The backlight also turns off when TIP You can turn off the first-letter
capitalization setting (see Setting input
an application’s power-saving features turn
options).
it off.

Entering numbers, punctuation, and


TIP You can change the backlight shut-off
interval. Press Start and select Settings.
symbols
Select the System tab, and then select Numbers, punctuation, and symbols
Backlight. Set the time interval on the Battery appear above the letters on the keys. To
Power tab and on the External Power tab. enter these characters, do one of the
following:
Entering lowercase and uppercase letters
• Press Option , and then press the
By default, the first letter of each sentence key of the desired character. You don’t
or field is capitalized and the remaining text need to hold Option while pressing the
you enter is lowercase. To enter other key.
uppercase letters, do one of the following:
• Press Option twice to turn on
• Press Shift ( or ), and then enter Option Lock, and then press the desired
a letter. You don’t need to press and keys to enter a series of characters.
hold Shift while entering a letter. When Option Lock is on, this symbol
• Press Shift ( or ) twice to turn on appears at the bottom of the screen: .
Caps Lock, and then enter a series of To turn off Option Lock, press Option
letters. When Caps Lock is on, this again.
symbol appears at the bottom of the
screen: . To turn off Caps Lock, press
Shift ( or ) again.

USING THE KEYBOARD 25


2
CHAPTER MOVING AROUND ON YOUR PALM® TREO™ 750 SMARTPHONE

Entering other symbols and accented 1 Press Alt to display the alternate
characters character list.
You can enter symbols and accented 2 Narrow the list by pressing the key that
characters that don't appear on the keys by corresponds to the character you want.
using the alternate characters list. For example, to enter an é, press e. See
the table below for a list of
TIP The alternate characters are grouped corresponding characters.
according to their similarity to the 3 Press Up or Down to highlight the
corresponding key. For example, the alternate desired character.
character available for the R key is ®, and for
the T key is ™. If you press the wrong key, 4 Press Center to insert the
press Backspace to return to the full list of character.
alternate characters. You can then press
another key.

26 USING THE KEYBOARD


MOVING AROUND ON YOUR PALM® TREO™ 750 SMARTPHONE 2

CHAPTER
0

Symbols and accented characters

Press Alt to select… Press Alt to select… Press Alt to select…


and and and
enter… enter… enter…

a áàäâãåæ n ñ x or X x¤

A ÁÀÄÂÃÅÆ N Ñ y ýÿ

b or B ß o óòöôœõ Y ÝŸ

c 碩 O ÓÒÖÔŒÕ 0 °
C Ç¢© p or P ¶ 1 1
¼ ½
e éèëê r or R ® 2 2

E ÉÈËÊ s ßš 3 3
¾

f or F ƒ S ߊ ! ¡

i íìïî t or T ™ $ £¥¢$

I ÍÌÏÎ u úùüû

l or L £ U ÚÙÜÛ
Press Alt by itself to select these characters:
:&_•%=÷^ £¥¢$[]{}<>«»©® ° ~\ص|

USING THE KEYBOARD 27


2
CHAPTER MOVING AROUND ON YOUR PALM® TREO™ 750 SMARTPHONE

Opening and closing TIP With the Start menu open, press the letter
underlined in the application’s name to open
applications the app. For example, press H to open Help.
Or, select the shortcut icons at the top of the
Start menu to open recently used
Opening applications
applications.
You can access all the applications on your In Programs, press a letter to jump to the first
smartphone through the Start menu. app that begins with that letter. For example,
press C to jump to Calculator. Press C again to
1 Press Start to open the Start menu.
jump to Camera, and so on.
2 Use the 5-way navigator to highlight the
DID YOU KNOW? You can open apps by pressing
application you want to use. To view and holding Option and then pressing Phone/
additional applications, select Send, Start, or OK. You can change which
Programs. app a button combination opens (see
Reassigning buttons).

3 Press Center to open the


highlighted application.
4 (Optional) Press OK to return to
Programs and open another application.
The current application continues to run
in the background.

Closing applications
You can have several applications open at
once, so you don’t need to exit an
application to open another one. In most
cases, applications close automatically

28 OPENING AND CLOSING APPLICATIONS


MOVING AROUND ON YOUR PALM® TREO™ 750 SMARTPHONE 2

CHAPTER
when available memory is low, but you can
also close applications manually.
Using your Today
NOTE If you press OK to leave an screen
application, the current application
continues to run in the background. From your Today screen you can quickly
Manually closing applications helps look up a contact, make a call, see your
conserve battery power and frees up latest calendar appointments, see the
memory. number of unread email messages, and
even perform a web search.
1 Press and hold OK to open Memory
Settings. To access your Today screen, press
Phone/Send .
2 On the Running Programs tab, do one
of the following:
TIP If you press Phone/Send while a number
• Select the application you want to
is highlighted, your smartphone dials the
close, and then select Stop to close number. If a number is highlighted, deselect
it. the number, or use the Start menu to access
• Select Stop All to close all your open the Today screen.
applications. TIP You can also open the Today screen by
pressing Power/End, unless you are on a call.
If you’re on a call, pressing Power/End hangs
up the call. If the Today screen is already
displayed and you’re not on a call, pressing
Power/End turns off the screen display.

USING YOUR TODAY SCREEN 29


2
CHAPTER MOVING AROUND ON YOUR PALM® TREO™ 750 SMARTPHONE

Title bar and


status info
Dial Lookup field
Speed-dial
entries

Web search field

• Title bar and status info: See What are • Speed-dial entries: Select a speed-dial
all those icons? to learn about the icons button—either a picture or text—to call
that appear in this area. the number assigned to it. See Defining
• Dial Lookup field: Type the number speed-dial buttons to create your own.
you want to call and press Center
TIP You can select a picture for your Today
to dial, or begin typing a name to look
screen background and select which items
up the associated number in Contacts.
appear in the Today screen. See Today screen
See Dialing by contact name for more
settings for details.
info.
• Web search field: Enter a web address
or a keyword and press Center or
Return to view a list of search
results based on the address or word
(data services connection required).

30 USING YOUR TODAY SCREEN


CHAP TE R

Your phone
The phone, along with the Today screen, is your home base for
making and receiving calls.
You can creatively manage multiple calls; for example, you can
swap between calls, send text messages to ignored calls, and
create conference calls.
And you can do more than manage your phone calls. You can
send text messages, open applications, go to your favorite web
pages, see your upcoming appointments, and even find out
how many unread email messages you have.

Benefits
• Stay in touch—you choose how • Create speed-dial buttons with
• Work in other applications when pictures of your friends
on an active call.
In this chapter
Turning your Palm® Treo™ 750 smartphone on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Making calls from the Today screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Other ways of making calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Receiving calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Using voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
What can I do during a call? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Defining speed-dial buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Customizing phone settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
What are all those icons? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
YOUR PHONE 3

CHAPTER
Turning your Palm® in the upper-left of the screen and the
signal-strength icon appears at the top
Treo™ 750 of the screen.
When you turn on your phone, it connects
smartphone on/off to a mobile network so that you can make
and receive phone calls and use other
The term smartphone refers to the device wireless services (if supported by the local
and its physical aspects. The term phone network). When you are inside a coverage
refers to the wireless feature of your Palm® area, the signal-strength icon has bars
Treo™ 750 smartphone that enables you to in it. If you’re outside a coverage area, the
connect to your wireless service provider’s indicator light flashes amber and no bars
network so that you can make and receive appear in the signal-strength icon.
calls and send and receive data.
DID YOU KNOW?You can press and hold the
The phone and the screen of your
Power/End button to turn your phone on and
smartphone can be turned off and on
off.
separately. This means you can wake up
DID YOU KNOW? You can go to Wireless
the screen to use just the organizer
Manager by tapping the signal-strength icon
features of your device without turning on and tapping Wireless Manager.
the phone. Also, when the screen is turned
off, the phone can be on and ready for you
to receive phone calls or messages. Turning your phone off
From the Today screen, press Menu
Turning your phone on (right action key), select Wireless
From the Today screen, press Menu Manager, and then select Phone. When
(right action key), select Wireless your phone is off, the phone-off icon
Manager, and then select Phone. When appears at the top of the screen and
your smartphone locates a signal, your Phone Off appears in the upper-left of the
wireless service provider’s name appears screen. Your phone is not connected to any

TURNING YOUR PALM® TREO™ 750 SMARTPHONE ON/OFF 33


3
CHAPTER YOUR PHONE

mobile network. Although you can no


longer use the phone, you can still use
Making calls from the
Microsoft Office apps and all the organizer
features of your smartphone.
Today screen
Waking up the screen and turning it off Your smartphone offers several ways to
make phone calls from the Today screen.
Wake up the screen and leave the phone
turned off when you want to use only the
Dialing from the Today screen
organizer features of your smartphone, for
example, when you’re on a plane and want 1 Go to your Today screen.
to look at your calendar. You can also turn
off the screen without turning off the
wireless features on your smartphone. You
can turn your screen on and off by pressing
Power/End .

TIP You can set how long the screen stays on.
Press Start, select Settings, select the
System tab, and then select Power. Select
the Advanced tab. Adjust the number of 2 Using the numbered keys on the
minutes the phone stays on when idle using keyboard, enter a phone number in the
the On battery power setting. Dial Lookup field.

DID YOU KNOW? When you're dialing a phone


number, you can enter * and # without first
pressing Option. This makes it easy to
respond to further dialing instructions.

3 Press Phone/Send to dial.

34 MAKING CALLS FROM THE TODAY SCREEN


YOUR PHONE 3

CHAPTER
NOTE You do not need to press Option to that you can select a button on the Today
access the numbers on the keyboard. screen to quickly dial a number.
However, when dialing short numbers, the
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Create some
number may conflict with a contact name.
speed-dial buttons. See Defining speed-dial
If this occurs, press Option to avoid
buttons. You can customize the default
starting a contact lookup. For emergencies,
speed-dial buttons. See Editing a
you can dial your national emergency
speed-dial button.
number (such as 911 or 112) without
pressing Option first.
You can make a call using your speed-dial
buttons by doing any of the following:
TIP If you press Phone/Send while a number
• Select a speed-dial button with the
is highlighted, your device dials the number. If
5-way navigator, and then press Center
a number is highlighted and you want to
.
access the Today screen, deselect the
number or use the Start menu.
TIP If you lock your smartphone and use a PIN
as the password, you can dial an emergency
number by entering the number in the
password field and pressing Send. You do not
need to press Option before entering the
number. However, if you select Strong
alphanumeric as the password type, you must
first press Option twice before entering the
number in the password field. See Locking
your smartphone.
• Tap a speed-dial button with the stylus.
Dialing with a speed-dial button • Press and hold the Quick Key that you
Your smartphone enables you to create assigned to the speed-dial button.
both picture and text speed-dial buttons so

MAKING CALLS FROM THE TODAY SCREEN 35


3
CHAPTER YOUR PHONE

• To dial an alternate number for a 1 Go to your Today screen.


contact, highlight the speed-dial button 2 Using the keyboard, begin entering one
and press and hold Center , or tap of the following for the contact you
and hold the button, and then select a want to call:
number from the shortcut menu.
To see more speed-dial buttons, highlight
the picture speed-dial area and press Right
or Left repeatedly, or highlight the text
speed-dial area and press Up , Down ,
Right , or Left .

TIPYou can hide your speed-dial buttons on


your Today Screen and still use your Quick
Keys to call a speed-dial number.

• First name (JOH for John)


Dialing by contact name
• Last name (SMI for Smith)
You can look up contacts quickly by
entering just a few letters of a contact’s • First initial, a space, and then last
name directly from your Today screen. initial (J S for John Smith)
• A few letters of the first name, a
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Before you can dial a
space, and then a few letters of the
number by contact name, you must create last name (JOH SMI for John Smith)
some contacts (see Adding a contact,) or
import them by synchronizing (see For example, entering SM finds both
Synchronizing information). Smilla Anderson and John Smith.
Entering SM AN finds only Smilla
Make sure your phone is on and that you’re Anderson.
inside a coverage area (see Turning your To clear the Dial Lookup field and start
phone on). another Contacts search, press OK. To

36 MAKING CALLS FROM THE TODAY SCREEN


YOUR PHONE 3

CHAPTER
delete letters when correcting a
misspelled name, press Backspace. DID YOU KNOW? You can paste numbers
directly into the Dial Pad. Copy a number from
another application, switch to Dial Pad, and
TIPTo see a contact’s address, company, and then press and hold Center on the 5-way to
other details, press Up to highlight the name paste the number.
and press Center on the 5-way.

BEFORE YOU BEGIN Make sure your


3 Select the number you want to dial. phone is on (see Turning your phone on).
4 Press Phone/Send or press
Center to dial. 1 Go to your Today screen.
2 Press Phone/Send and select
DID YOU KNOW? After you look up a contact, Dial Pad.
you can select how you want to communicate
with that person. Press and hold Center on 3 Tap the onscreen Dial Pad to enter the
the 5-way, or tap and hold with the stylus, and number.
then select the communication method you
want to use.

Dialing using the onscreen Dial Pad


The onscreen Dial Pad is useful when you
need to dial numbers that are expressed as
letters and when you need large numbers
that you can tap with your finger or the
stylus.

4 Press Phone/Send to dial.

MAKING CALLS FROM THE TODAY SCREEN 37


3
CHAPTER YOUR PHONE

Redialing a recently called number


TIP You can also access the Call Log and Dial
• To dial the last number you called: Pad from the Today screen by pressing Menu
Go to your Today screen, and then press (right action key).
and hold Phone/Send .
• To select from your most recently
dialed numbers: Go to your Today
screen, press Phone/Send ,
Other ways of
highlight the number or contact name making calls
you want to call, and then press Phone/
Send to dial.
Your smartphone offers several ways to
make phone calls other than from the
Today screen. Try them all and you’ll
discover which methods you prefer.

Dialing by company name


BEFORE YOU BEGIN Make sure your
phone is on (see Turning your phone on).

1 Press Start and select Contacts.


2 Press Menu (right action key)
• To select from a chronological list of
and select View By > Company.
calls: Go to your Today screen, press
Phone/Send , and then select Call 3 Using the keyboard, begin entering the
Log. Highlight the number you want to first few letters of the company name.
call, and then press either Call 4 Select the number you want to dial.
(left action key) or Phone/Send to 5 Press Phone/Send to dial.
dial.

38 OTHER WAYS OF MAKING CALLS


YOUR PHONE 3

CHAPTER
Dialing from a web page or message
Your smartphone recognizes most phone
Receiving calls
numbers that appear in web pages or in
messages (text, email, or multimedia). To answer calls, your phone must be on.
This is different from having only the
screen turned on (see Turning your phone
on). When your phone is off, your calls go
to voicemail.
See a picture of the person calling you!
Learn how to assign a caller ID picture in
Adding a contact.
If music is playing when a call arrives, the
smartphone rings softly. You can answer
the phone as you normally would. The
1 Use the 5-way to highlight the phone audio pauses during your call.
number you want to dial in the web To answer a call, do one of the following:
page or message.
• Press Phone/Send .
2 Press Center to open the Phone
dialog box, and then select Yes to dial. • Press Answer (left action key).
• If the headset is attached, press the
TIPIf you can’t dial a phone number directly headset button.
from a web page or a message, highlight the
To ignore a call and send it to voicemail,
number, select Edit (right action key), and
press Menu (right action key) and
then select Copy. Open the Dial Pad, and then
press and hold Center on the 5-way to paste. select Ignore, or press Power/End .
Press Phone/Send to dial.

RECEIVING CALLS 39
3
CHAPTER YOUR PHONE

DID YOU KNOW? You can also ignore a call and Using voicemail
send a text message. Press Menu (right
action key) and select Ignore with text
Setting up voicemail
message.
1 Go to your Today screen.
To silence the ringer while your 2 Press and hold 1 on the keyboard or tap
smartphone is ringing: the Voicemail speed-dial button to dial
your wireless service provider’s
• Press the Volume button or any key on voicemail system.
your smartphone except Phone/Send
, Power/End , Alt , Start , DID YOU KNOW? For some wireless service
OK , or the 5-way. providers, the Voicemail speed-dial button
• To immediately silence all system may not be assigned to a number. If that’s the
sounds including the ringer, slide the case, you can edit the Voicemail speed-dial
Ringer switch to Sound Off . All button to add the number to your service
provider’s voicemail system (see Editing a
sounds remain off until you slide the
speed-dial button), or you can create a new
Ringer switch back to Sound On .
speed-dial button with the number (see
When you silence the ringer, you can either Creating a speed-dial button).
answer the call or let it ring through to
voicemail. 3 Follow the voice prompts to set up your
voicemail.

40 USING VOICEMAIL
YOUR PHONE 3

CHAPTER
Retrieving voicemail messages from the
Today screen DID YOU KNOW? When a Voicemail icon
appears at the top of the screen, you can tap
this icon to retrieve your voicemail.
TIP You can display onscreen voicemail
playback controls; see Creating a speed-dial
button.

Retrieving messages from a voicemail


notification
NOTE Not all service plans support
voicemail notification. Check with your
wireless service provider for more
When you have unretrieved voicemail
information.
messages, a Voicemail icon appears at
the top of your screen.
You can retrieve voicemail messages when
1 Go to your Today screen. you receive a notification, or you can
2 Press 1 on the keyboard to dial your dismiss the notification and retrieve the
wireless service provider’s voicemail messages later.
system. • When you have a new voicemail
3 Enter your voicemail password using message, a notification screen appears.
the keyboard, or press Extra Digits
(left action key) if you defined
this option (see Creating a speed-dial
button for details).

USING VOICEMAIL 41
3
CHAPTER YOUR PHONE

• To hear your message now, press


Listen (left action key).
• To retrieve your message later, press
Dismiss (right action key).

What can I do during


a call?
Caller’s name Current duration
Your smartphone offers many advanced and number of call
telephone features, including call waiting,
six-way conferencing, and call forwarding. During a call, you can do any of the
These features depend on your service following:
plan. Please contact your wireless service
Navigate around the Today screen: Use
provider for more information.
Up and Down to move around or
When you make or receive a call, the active highlight items.
call info appears on your Today screen.
Put the call on hold: Press Hold
(left action key). To take the call off hold,
press Off Hold (left action key).
Use the built-in speakerphone: Press
Menu (right action key) and select
Speakerphone. To turn the speakerphone
off, press Menu (right action key)
again and select Speakerphone Off.

42 WHAT CAN I DO DURING A CALL?


YOUR PHONE 3

CHAPTER
Mute the microphone so you can’t be Switching applications during an active
heard: Press Menu (right action call
key) and select Mute. To turn the You can use many other applications on
microphone back on, press Menu your smartphone while holding a phone
(right action key) again and select Cancel conversation, including the organizer and
Mute. text message features. You cannot,
Switch to another application: Press however, make some data connections
Start and select the application. during an active call while connected to a
GPRS network. If you’re connected to a
GPRS network, you cannot browse the
DID YOU KNOW? When a call lasts longer than
one minute, the screen dims. After two
web, or send and receive email or MMS
minutes, it dims more. Press any key, except messages while on a voice call. If you’re
Power/End, to light up the screen. connected to a UMTS or HSDPA network,
DID YOU KNOW? You can send and receive text
you can perform simultaneous voice and
messages during a call. This is a great way to data functions. How can you tell which kind
stay connected with colleagues during a long of network you’re connected to? See What
call. are all those icons?
NOTE Some wireless service providers do
Ending a call not support simultaneous voice and data
Do one of the following: functions over an HSDPA network; check
with your wireless service provider for
• Press Power/End .
information.
• Press the headset button (if the headset
is attached and has a button on it). To open an application, see Opening and
Some headsets do not have a button. closing applications.
From any application, press Phone/Send
to return to your Today screen.

WHAT CAN I DO DURING A CALL? 43


3
CHAPTER YOUR PHONE

Saving phone numbers


TIP If you disable the Add Contact prompt, you
After you hang up a call, you can add the can turn it on again. From your Today screen,
number of the person you were talking press Menu (right action key) and select
with to Contacts if it's not already in your Preferences > Phone Settings. On the
list. If an incoming call uses caller ID Phone tab, check the After calls from
blocking, you do not see the Add Contact numbers that are not in Contacts, ask if I
prompt. want to add them box.
TIP You can also save contact info from other
applications, such as Messaging.

If you don’t add a number right away, follow


these steps to add it later:
1 Go to the Call Log (see Other ways of
making calls).
• To create a new contact for this number,
select Create New Contact. 2 Highlight the number you want to save.
• To add this number to an existing 3 Press and hold Center to open the
contact, select Copy and Add, and shortcut menu, and then select Save to
then select a contact name. Contacts.
• To decline adding the number, press 4 Enter the information for the entry.
Dismiss (left action key). 5 Press OK .
• To disable the Add Contact prompt,
select Don’t show this again. Making a second call
You can make a second call while your first
call is still active:
1 Place your first call on hold by pressing
Hold (left action key).

44 WHAT CAN I DO DURING A CALL?


YOUR PHONE 3

CHAPTER
2 Dial a second number using any of the Send the new call to voicemail: Press
methods described in Making calls from Menu (right action key) and select
the Today screen. If you’re dialing by Ignore.
contact name or with the keyboard, you
Send the new caller a text message:
must first use the 5-way to select the
Press Menu (right action key) and
Dial Lookup field.
select Ignore with text message. The
When two calls are active, your Today second call is sent to voicemail. A new text
screen includes two call status sections, message opens with the phone number of
each representing one of the calls. the caller entered in the To field.
Hang up the current call and answer the
new call: Press Menu (right action
key) and select Drop and Answer. You can
also press Power/End to hang up the
current call, and then choose to answer or
ignore the new call.
Place the current call on hold and
answer the new call:
Press Answer (left action key) or
Phone/Send . After you have
Answering a second call (call waiting) answered the call:

When you’re on a call and you receive a


second call, the call waiting notification
appears if you have chosen to be notified
(see Setting call waiting notification). You
can do any of the following:

WHAT CAN I DO DURING A CALL? 45


3
CHAPTER YOUR PHONE

1 Answer a second call (see Answering a


second call (call waiting)), or put the first
call on hold and make a second call (see
Making a second call).
2 Press Conference (right action
key). This joins the two calls with you in
a conference.

• Press Swap (left action key) to


move between callers by placing the
current active call on hold and talking on
the other line.
• Make the calls a conference call. See
Making a conference call.

Making a conference call 3 (Optional) Do one or more of the


IMPORTANT You can join up to 5 calls into following:
a 6-way conference call. The number of • Make more calls and join them into
calls you can join in conference depends on the conference call. The number of
your service plan. Additional charges may calls you can join in conference
apply, and minutes in your mobile account depends on your service plan.
may be deducted for each call. Please • Extract a caller from the conference
contact your wireless service provider for call to talk with them privately by
more information. pressing Menu (right action
key), selecting Extract, and then

46 WHAT CAN I DO DURING A CALL?


YOUR PHONE 3

CHAPTER
selecting the name. The extracted call When all calls are forwarded, the call
becomes the active call. forwarding icon appears in the title bar.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Make sure your
phone is on and that you’re inside a
coverage area (see Turning your phone on).

1 Go to your Today screen.


2 Press Menu (right action key),
select Preferences, and then select
Phone Settings.
3 Select the Services tab, and then select
Call Forwarding from the list.
• Swap between the conference call 4 Set your call forwarding settings. Some
and the private call by pressing Swap of the settings are already set by your
(left action key). wireless service provider to send your
4 When you’re done, press Power/End calls to Voicemail.
twice to hang up on all calls or
press Power/End once to hang up
on the active call.

Forwarding calls
You can forward calls to another phone
number. Please check with your wireless
service provider about availability and
pricing of forwarded calls; additional
charges may apply.

5 Press OK .

WHAT CAN I DO DURING A CALL? 47


3
CHAPTER YOUR PHONE

Defining speed-dial
buttons
Your smartphone enables you to create
both picture and text speed-dial buttons so
that you can select a button on the Today
screen to quickly dial a number.

Creating a speed-dial button


4 (Optional) Enter a Quick Key. When the
You can create up to 20 picture buttons and Today screen is showing, you can press
50 text buttons. and hold the Quick Key to instantly dial
1 Go to your Today screen. this number.
2 Press Menu (right action key) Quick Keys can be letters or numbers,
and select New Speed Dial. but you can’t use both the letter and
number on the same key. For example,
3 Do one of the following:
the voicemail Quick Key is 1. The letter
• Select Link to contact, select the equivalent for that key is E, so you
contact you want to link to this button, cannot assign E as a Quick Key to
and then select the number you want another speed-dial button.
to dial with this button.
5 If this button is linked to a contact entry
• Select Label and enter a name for this
with a picture, select either Text Speed
button, and then select Number and
Dial or Picture Speed Dial to indicate
enter the phone number you want to
which type of button you want to
dial with this button.
create. If this button is not linked to a
contact or the contact doesn’t have a

48 DEFINING SPEED-DIAL BUTTONS


YOUR PHONE 3

CHAPTER
picture, the Picture Speed Dial option is do not check this box, you need to press
not available. Extra Digits (left action key) to
dial these digits.
TIPYou can add a special ringtone to a contact
associated with the speed-dial button. See
Show voice mail buttons: Displays the
Adding a contact. voicemail playback controls after you
dial this speed-dial number. When this
option is checked, you can enter
6 (Optional) Select the Advanced tab and
numbers below each control to tailor
set any of the following options:
the controls to your voicemail system.
Extra Digits: Defines additional
numbers to dial, such as a password or Plays the previous message.
extension. In addition to numbers, you Saves the current message.
can enter the following symbols: star
( ) and pound (#). To enter a one- Plays the current message.
*
second pause, enter a comma (,). Deletes the current message.
Repeats the current message.
Plays the next message.
7 Press OK .

Editing a speed-dial button


1 Go to your Today screen.
2 Highlight the speed-dial button you
want to edit.
3 Press and hold Center to open the
Dial extra digits automatically: Dials
shortcut menu, and then select Edit
predefined Extra Digits immediately
Speed Dial.
after dialing the phone number. If you

DEFINING SPEED-DIAL BUTTONS 49


3
CHAPTER YOUR PHONE

4 Make the desired changes.


5 Press OK .
Using a phone
headset
TIPYou can also edit a speed-dial button by
pressing Menu and selecting Speed Dial
Options, and then selecting the button you You can connect a phone headset for
want to edit. hands-free operation. You can use either
the headset that came with your
Deleting a speed-dial button smartphone or a compatible third-party
headset.
1 Go to your Today screen.
2 Highlight the speed-dial button you IMPORTANT If driving while using a
want to delete. smartphone is permitted where you are
and you need to make a call, we
3 Press and hold Center to open the
recommend using a phone headset or a
shortcut menu, and then select Edit
hands-free car kit (sold separately). If you
Speed Dial.
must use the wired headset while driving,
4 Press Delete (right action key). place a speaker in only one ear. Leave the
5 Select Yes to confirm the deletion. other ear free to hear outside noises. Make
such a call only if it is legal to do so and you
Arranging your speed-dial buttons can do so safely.
1 Go to your Today screen.
2 Press Menu (right action key)
and select Speed Dial Options.
3 Highlight the button you want to move.
4 Press Option + Left or Right or
Up or Down to move the button
in that direction.

50 USING A PHONE HEADSET


YOUR PHONE 3

CHAPTER
Using a wired headset

Microphone Headset button

Speakers

The headset button is context-sensitive, NOTE Your smartphone works with


and it performs various actions based on headsets that have a 2.5mm, 3-pin
the situation. You can press the headset connector (look for two colored bands on
button to perform any of the following the plug). When in doubt, ask the
tasks: third-party headset manufacturer if the
product is compatible with your
• Answer an incoming call
smartphone. If you hear a headset buzz or
• Respond to call waiting poor microphone performance, your
• Hang up all calls headset may be incompatible with your
• Swap between calls smartphone.

USING A PHONE HEADSET 51


3
CHAPTER YOUR PHONE

Connecting to a Bluetooth® hands-free passkey that you need to enter on your


device smartphone in step 7.
Your smartphone is also compatible with 2 Go to your Today screen, and then tap
many headsets and car kits (sold Bluetooth .
separately) enabled with Bluetooth® 3 Check the Turn on Bluetooth box to
wireless technology version 1.1 or 1.2. turn on the Bluetooth feature.
For a list of compatible hands-free devices
with Bluetooth wireless technology, go to
www.palm.com/treo750-support.
After you set up a connection with a
Bluetooth headset or hands-free car kit,
you can communicate with that device
whenever it is within range and the
Bluetooth feature on your smartphone is
turned on. The range varies greatly,
depending on environmental factors. The
maximum is about 10 meters (30 feet). 4 Select the Devices tab, and then select
New Partnership.
DID YOU KNOW? If you have both a compatible
Bluetooth headset and a car kit, the one you
connected to your smartphone last becomes
the active device.

1 If necessary, prepare the device with


which you want to connect to accept a
new connection. Check the device’s
documentation for details. Be sure to
find out if the device has a predefined

52 USING A PHONE HEADSET


YOUR PHONE 3

CHAPTER
IMPORTANT Some hands-free devices
have a predefined passkey. If your
hands-free device has one, you can find
the passkey in the documentation for that
device. Other devices provide a screen
where you enter a passkey that you make
up. In either case, you must use the same
passkey on both your smartphone and your
hands-free device. We recommend that
you use a passkey of 16 digits, where
5 Wait for your smartphone to search for possible, to improve the security of your
devices and to display the device list. smartphone. The longer the passkey, the
more difficult it is for the passkey to be
deciphered.

DID YOU KNOW? The Bluetooth icon on your


Today screen indicates the status of the
Bluetooth feature:
Gray = Bluetooth off.
Blue = Bluetooth on.
White = Connected to a Bluetooth device.
Headset icon = Call in progress with a
6 Select the device you want to connect Bluetooth headset or car kit.
to, and then press Next (right
action key). 8 If the passkey is not predefined, enter
7 Enter a passkey between 1 and 16 the same passkey on the other
digits long, and then press Next Bluetooth device, and then press Finish
(right action key). (right action key).

USING A PHONE HEADSET 53


3
CHAPTER YOUR PHONE

9 Check the Hands Free box, and then (Bluetooth headset or car kit required,
press Finish (right action key). sold separately), unplug the wired
10 Press OK . headset and press the button on the
Bluetooth headset or car kit.
You can now communicate with this device
whenever it is within range and the • To find out how to transfer your
Bluetooth feature on your smartphone is contacts from your smartphone to your
turned on. The range varies greatly, car kit, go to www.palm.com/
depending on environmental factors. The treo750-support.
maximum is about 10 meters (30 feet).
DID YOU KNOW? If you’re using a Bluetooth
hands-free device and it is within range, your
Using a Bluetooth hands-free device
smartphone routes all calls to the hands-free
To learn how to set up and connect to device instead of to the earpiece on your
Bluetooth devices, see Connecting to a smartphone. Bluetooth range is up to 10
Bluetooth® hands-free device. meters (30 feet) in optimum environmental
conditions.
Here are tips for working with a Bluetooth
hands-free device:
• To transfer a call from the handset to a
Bluetooth hands-free device during a
Customizing phone
call, press Menu (right action settings
key) and select Connect Bluetooth. To
transfer the call back to the headset,
Selecting ringtones and display notices
press Menu (right action key)
and select Cancel Bluetooth. You can set different tones for different
types of incoming phone calls and
• To transfer a call from a wired headset
notifications. You can download MP3,
to a Bluetooth headset or car kit that is
MIDI, AMR, WAV, and WMA ringtones
within range and with which you’ve
directly to your smartphone (see
previously set up a partnership

54 CUSTOMIZING PHONE SETTINGS


YOUR PHONE 3

CHAPTER
Downloading files and images from a web
page). You can also download ringtones to
your computer and then email them to your
phone.
1 Press Start and select Settings.
2 On the Personal tab, select Sounds &
Notifications .
3 Select the Notifications tab.
4 Select the Event list, and then select
which type of call or notification for Phone: Roaming: A call that comes in
which you want to set the ringtone: when you’re outside your home mobile
Phone: Known Caller: An incoming call network.
from someone in your Contacts list or Phone: Unknown Caller: An incoming
Speed Dial list. call from someone identified by caller
ID who is not in your Contacts list or
Speed Dial list.
Phone: Voice mail: A new voicemail.
5 If you selected Known Caller, Roaming,
or Unknown Caller, select the ring type
and the ringtone. Select the Play icon to
preview the ringtone sound.
6 If you selected Missed call or Voice
mail, set the following options:
Phone: Missed call: A call you did not • Check the Play Sound box if you
answer. want to have a sound played when
the event occurs.

CUSTOMIZING PHONE SETTINGS 55


3
CHAPTER YOUR PHONE

• If you checked the Play Sound box, Adjusting call and ringer volume
then select the sound for the selected
type of call. You can also check the
Repeat box to have the sound repeat.
• (Optional) Select the Play icon to
preview the sound.
• Check the Display message on
screen box to have a message
displayed when the event occurs. Volume
7 Check the Vibrate when… boxes to
turn the vibrate feature on/off based on
the Ringer switch setting.
8 Repeat steps 4–7 to select ringtones for • Call volume: While a call is in progress,
other types of calls. press the Volume button (on the side of
9 Press OK . your smartphone) to adjust the call
volume.
DID YOU KNOW? You can record, preview, • Ringer volume: When a call is not in
delete, and send sounds on your smartphone. progress and you are not playing music
You can also set sounds for messaging or a video, press the Volume button to
notifications and calendar reminders. See adjust ringer volume.
Selecting Sounds & Notifications.

Assigning a caller ID ringtone


1 Press Start and select Contacts.
2 Select the contact’s name.
3 Press Menu (right action key)
and select Edit.

56 CUSTOMIZING PHONE SETTINGS


YOUR PHONE 3

CHAPTER
4 Select Ring tone. BEFORE YOU BEGIN Turn on your phone
5 Select a tone for this contact entry. to access your Phone Settings. See Turning
your phone on..
6 Select OK.
1 Press Start and select Settings.
Enabling TTY
You can enable your smartphone for use
with a TTY/TDD device. A TTY (also known
as a TDD or Text Telephone) is a
telecommunications device that enables
people who are deaf or hard of hearing, or
who have speech or language disabilities,
to communicate by telephone.
Your smartphone is compatible with select
TTY devices. You can connect a TTY/TDD
machine, headset, or hands-free kit to your 2 On the Personal tab, select Phone .
smartphone through the headset jack while
in TTY/TDD mode. Please check with the 3 On the Phone tab, select the TTY/TDD
manufacturer of your TTY device for list, and then select either On or Off.
connectivity information. Be sure that the 4 Press OK .
TTY device supports digital wireless NOTE When TTY/TDD is on, a TTY/TDD
transmission. icon appears at the top of the Today
NOTE Not all wireless service providers screen.
support the TTY feature on your
smartphone. Check with your wireless Adding contact numbers from new callers
service provider for information. By default, you are prompted to add
contact entries for numbers that are not

CUSTOMIZING PHONE SETTINGS 57


3
CHAPTER YOUR PHONE

already in your Contacts list. You can turn 2 Press Menu (right action key),
this feature on or off. select Preferences, and then select
Phone Settings.
1 Press Start and select Settings.
3 Select the Services tab, and then select
2 On the Personal tab, select Phone .
Call Barring from the list.
3 On the Phone tab, check the After calls
from numbers that are not in
Contacts, ask if I want to add them
box.
4 Press OK .

Blocking calls
You can block incoming or outgoing calls.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN You need to do the
following:
• Make sure that call barring is supported 4 Select the Block incoming calls list,
by your service plan. Check with your and then select one of the options:
wireless service provider for more Off: No incoming calls are blocked.
information.
When roaming: All incoming calls are
• Get a call barring password from your blocked when roaming.
wireless service provider.
All calls: All incoming calls are blocked.
• Make sure your phone is on and that
you’re inside a coverage area (see 5 Select the Block outgoing calls list,
Turning your phone on). and then select one of the options:
Off: No outgoing calls are blocked.
1 Go to your Today screen.
International: All outgoing international
calls are blocked.

58 CUSTOMIZING PHONE SETTINGS


YOUR PHONE 3

CHAPTER
International except to home
country: All outgoing international calls
are blocked except to the country
where the phone is based.
All calls: All outgoing calls are blocked.
6 Press OK .
7 Enter the call barring password and
select Done (right action key).

Setting caller ID
5 Press OK .
You can turn caller ID on or off.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Make sure your Setting call waiting notification
phone is on and that you’re inside a You can choose to be notified when you
coverage area (see Turning your phone on). receive a call while you are on a call. You
can choose to accept the call or not. See
1 Go to your Today screen. Answering a second call (call waiting).
2 Press Menu (right action key), BEFORE YOU BEGIN Make sure your
select Preferences, and then select phone is on and that you’re inside a
Phone Settings. coverage area (see Turning your phone on).
3 Select the Services tab, and then select
Caller ID from the list. 1 Go to your Today screen.
4 Select the appropriate option to provide 2 Press Menu (right action key),
your caller ID to Everyone or No one. select Preferences, and then select
Phone Settings.
3 Select the Services tab, and then select
Call Waiting.

CUSTOMIZING PHONE SETTINGS 59


3
CHAPTER YOUR PHONE

4 Select the appropriate option to receive 2 Press Menu (right action key),
notification or not. select Preferences, and then select
Phone Settings.
3 Select the Services tab, and then select
Band Selection from the list.
4 Select the Select network type list,
and then select one of the following:

5 Press OK .

Manually selecting your wireless band


IMPORTANT The wireless band setting is
preset for optimum performance. Do not
Auto: Automatically selects a network.
change this setting unless instructed to do
so by a representative from your wireless GSM: Connects only to GSM networks.
service provider.
UMTS: Connects only to UMTS or
HSDPA networks.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Make sure your
phone is on and that you’re inside a 5 Select the Select your GSM/UMTS
coverage area (see Turning your phone on). Band list, and then select either Auto or
one of the bands listed. The band
1 Go to your Today screen. options differ depending on your
wireless service provider.

60 CUSTOMIZING PHONE SETTINGS


YOUR PHONE 3

CHAPTER
6 Press OK . 2 Press Menu (right action key),
select Preferences, and then select
Enabling fixed dialing Phone Settings.
Fixed dialing allows you to restrict your 3 Select the Services tab, and then select
outgoing calls and messages to selected Fixed Dialing.
phone numbers included in your fixed 4 Check the Enable fixed dialing box.
dialing list. After the service is activated,
you can call and send messages only to the
phone numbers from the list.
The list is protected by a PIN2 code. If you
enter an incorrect PIN2 more times than
allowed by your wireless service provider,
the SIM card locks. After the SIM card
locks, you need the PUK2 (pin unblocking
key) to unlock the SIM card. Contact your
wireless service provider for more
information and your PIN2 and PUK2.
5 Press Menu (right action key) to
BEFORE YOU BEGIN add, delete, or edit the phone numbers
• Make sure your phone is on and that in the list.
you’re inside a coverage area (see 6 Enter your PIN2 and press Done
Turning your phone on). (left action key).
• Get your PIN2 from your wireless 7 Press OK .
service provider
Manually selecting your network settings
1 Go to your Today screen.
IMPORTANT The network setting is preset
for optimum performance. Do not change
this setting unless instructed to do so by a

CUSTOMIZING PHONE SETTINGS 61


3
CHAPTER YOUR PHONE

representative from your wireless service next to the networks you want, and
provider. then select your order of preference.
6 From the Network Selection list, select
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Make sure your an option:
phone is on and that you’re inside a
Automatic: The network connection is
coverage area (see Turning your phone on).
automatically made.
1 Go to your Today screen. Manual: Network connections are
2 Press Menu (right action key), manually made. If you are manually
select Preferences, and then select selecting a network, select a network
Phone Settings. from the list of available networks.
3 Select the Network tab. 7 Press OK .

What are all those


icons?
You can monitor the status of several items
using icons at the top of your Today screen:

You missed an incoming call.


4 To switch to another network, select
You have a voicemail message.
Find Network and select an available
network. You have a new email message.
5 To change your preferred network,
select Set Networks, check the box

62 WHAT ARE ALL THOSE ICONS?


YOUR PHONE 3

CHAPTER
You have a new text, or Your phone is on and a UMTS or
multimedia message. HSDPA data connection is active.
No SIM card is inserted or You can make and receive calls
software is unable to recognize and transmit data
the SIM. simultaneously.

You have more than one of the Your phone is connected to a


conditions listed above. GPRS (EDGE if available)
network, but you are not actively
Your phone is on. The bars
transmitting data. You can still
display the signal strength.
make or receive calls.
The stronger the signal, the
more bars that appear. If you are Your phone is on and a GPRS
outside a coverage area, no bars (EDGE if available) data
appear. connection is active. You can still
make or receive calls, but the
Your phone is off.
data transmission is
A voice call is in progress. automatically interrupted.
ActiveSync synchronization is in
TTY/TDD is turned on. progress.
Your smartphone is connecting
All calls are being forwarded.
to a computer or network.
Your phone is connected to a A data connection is not available
UMTS or HSDPA network, but or your phone is off.
you are not actively transmitting
data. You can still make or Your smartphone’s battery is low.
receive calls.

WHAT ARE ALL THOSE ICONS? 63


3
CHAPTER YOUR PHONE

Your smartphone’s battery is The Bluetooth wireless


®

charging. technology status indicator


Your smartphone is connected to appears in gray when this feature
a power outlet and the battery is is off, in blue when this feature is
fully charged. on, and in reverse blue when
your smartphone
Wireless Your phone is on. When you turn
is communicating with another
service off your phone, Phone Off
Bluetooth device.
provider appears instead.
name A call is in progress and your
smartphone is connected to a
Bluetooth headset or car kit.

64 WHAT ARE ALL THOSE ICONS?


CHAP TE R

Synchronizing information
Synchronizing means that information that has been entered or
updated in one place—your Palm® Treo™ 750 smartphone, your
computer, or your corporate server—is automatically updated in
the other. There’s no need to enter information twice. Some
types of synchronization can happen on an automated schedule,
so you don’t even have to think about it.
After you get into the habit of synchronizing regularly, you’ll
know what a powerful tool synchronization is for transferring,
updating, and backing up large amounts of information on your
smartphone.

Benefits
• Quickly enter and update • Send photos and videos to your
information on your computer and smartphone from your desktop
your smartphone computer
• Protect your information
In this chapter
Synchronization overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
How do I synchronize? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
What can I synchronize? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Setting up your computer for synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Synchronizing using the sync cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Setting up wireless synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Other ways to synchronize. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Setting synchronization options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
SYNCHRONIZING INFORMATION 4

CHAPTER
Synchronization
overview
You can, however, customize sync settings
This chapter discusses using ActiveSync ®

to suit your needs and sync only some of


desktop software and other methods to these applications.
synchronize your smartphone and your
computer. If you set up ActiveSync synchronization
with your computer, information in the
Synchronization enables you to enter or Favorites application is synchronized by
change information on your smartphone or default as well. You can also change
in Microsoft Office Outlook®. Your info is settings to synchronize Word, Excel,
then automatically updated in both places; PowerPoint, and PDF files, as well as
there’s no need to enter the info twice. pictures, music, videos, and other types of
This is true whether you sync with your files (see Changing which applications
computer using ActiveSync desktop sync). For synchronization of music and
software (see Setting up your computer for videos, you also must have Windows
synchronization) or wirelessly with your Media Player 10 on your computer.
®

company’s Exchange Server using


Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync (see
Setting up wireless synchronization).
By default, the info from the following
applications is synchronized for either
method of synchronization:

SYNCHRONIZATION OVERVIEW 67
4
CHAPTER SYNCHRONIZING INFORMATION

synchronize wirelessly with an Exchange


DID YOU KNOW? When you sync Favorites, it Server. You can, of course, choose to sync
creates a folder in your computer’s web
both with an Exchange Server and with
browser called Mobile Favorites that backs up
ActiveSync desktop software to maximize
any favorites you create in the browser on
your smartphone. You can add or remove your sync options.
favorites directly to or from the folder.
Synchronizing with ActiveSync desktop
TIP If you don’t already have Windows Media
Player installed on your computer, you can software
install it from the Windows Mobile Getting BEFORE YOU BEGIN Install the software
Started Disc. Insert the CD into your from the Windows Mobile Getting Started
computer’s CD drive, select Add Programs, Disc, which came with your smartphone.
and then select Windows Media Player. You must install this software even if you
have already installed a previous version of
You can set up your smartphone to use any ActiveSync desktop software. See
combination of wireless sync, ActiveSync Installing the desktop synchronization
synchronization, and Windows Media software for instructions.
Player sync.
If you install ActiveSync desktop software
from the Windows Mobile Getting Started
How do I Disc, you can choose to synchronize in any
of the following ways:
synchronize? • By connecting your smartphone to your
computer using the sync cable (see
There are a number of ways to make Synchronizing using the sync cable)
synchronization occur. You can install • Wirelessly, using the built-in Bluetooth®
ActiveSync desktop software on your wireless technology on your
computer to synchronize in one of a smartphone (see Synchronizing over a
number of ways, or you may be able to Bluetooth connection)

68 HOW DO I SYNCHRONIZE?
SYNCHRONIZING INFORMATION 4

CHAPTER
• Wirelessly, using the infrared (IR) port NOTE We recommend that you install
on your smartphone (see Synchronizing ActiveSync desktop software from the CD
over an infrared connection) even if you synchronize wirelessly with the
server. You need ActiveSync to synchronize
Synchronizing wirelessly with the server pictures, videos, music files, and other info
You can set up your smartphone to directly with your computer.
synchronize email and other information
wirelessly with Microsoft Exchange Server
2003 using Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync What can I
(see Setting up wireless synchronization). If
you choose this method, synchronization synchronize?
takes place automatically after setup. You
do not need to install the software from This table lists the types of info you can
the Windows Mobile Getting Started Disc, synchronize and the methods to use.
which came with your smartphone.

Info type Method Where to learn more


Outlook Contacts, ActiveSync (sync with Setting up your computer for
Calendar, Tasks computer) or Exchange synchronization or
ActiveSync (direct sync
Setting up wireless synchronization
with server)
Outlook Email ActiveSync or Exchange Setting up your computer for
ActiveSync synchronization or
Setting up wireless synchronization

WHAT CAN I SYNCHRONIZE? 69


4
CHAPTER SYNCHRONIZING INFORMATION

Info type Method Where to learn more


Word, Excel, ActiveSync Setting up your computer for
PowerPoint, PDF synchronization
files
Synchronizing your Microsoft Office
files
Changing which applications sync
Music and video ActiveSync and Windows Setting up your computer for
files Media Player 10 synchronization
Changing which applications sync
Transferring media files to your
smartphone
Pictures ActiveSync Setting up your computer for
synchronization
Changing which applications sync
Outlook Notes ActiveSync Setting up your computer for
synchronization
Changing which applications sync
Files to be ActiveSync Setting up your computer for
transferred to an synchronization
expansion card
Changing which applications sync

70 WHAT CAN I SYNCHRONIZE?


SYNCHRONIZING INFORMATION 4

CHAPTER
Setting up your TIP If you want to synchronize with a personal
information manager (PIM) other than
computer for Microsoft Office Outlook, you must install a
third-party solution. Contact the PIM’s vendor
synchronization to learn if software is available for your
smartphone.

Why set up a connection between your


smartphone and your computer? So you Before you can synchronize, you need to
can synchronize them. Why synchronize? install the desktop synchronization
Here are two good reasons: software and connect the sync cable to
your computer. Even if you have already
• After you enter info on your computer, installed a previous version of ActiveSync
you don’t need to enter it again on your desktop software, you must install the
smartphone. Whether you enter or software that came with your smartphone
change information on your computer on the Windows Mobile Getting Started
using Microsoft Office Outlook or on Disc.
your smartphone, when you
synchronize, you automatically update System requirements
the info in both places.
Your computer must meet the following
• You have a backup copy of all your info. minimum system requirements:
Should anything happen to your
smartphone, your info still exists on • Windows 2000 or XP (later versions
your computer. may also be supported)
We strongly recommend that you • 32MB of available memory (RAM)
synchronize your smartphone with your • 170MB of free hard disk space
computer frequently to keep your • CD drive
information up-to-date (and backed up) in
• Available USB port
both locations.

SETTING UP YOUR COMPUTER FOR SYNCHRONIZATION 71


4
CHAPTER SYNCHRONIZING INFORMATION

• USB sync cable (included with your computer and your smartphone. For
smartphone) more info, see Connecting your
smartphone to your computer and
Installing the desktop synchronization Synchronizing information.
software
BEFORE YOU BEGIN If you are installing DID YOU KNOW? During software installation,
the software on a computer at work, make you can select an option to synchronize email,
sure your company allows you to install contacts, calendar events, and tasks directly
new software. Contact your company’s with Microsoft Exchange Server 2003. If you
choose this option, you are prompted to enter
IT department for help.
your mail server address and domain name
and your Exchange Server account username
1 Close any applications that are currently and password.
running on your computer, including
TIP You can also install additional software
those running in the background. Your from the Windows Mobile Getting Started
computer must have all its resources Disc (see Installing bonus software from the
available to install the software. CD).
2 Insert the Windows Mobile Getting
Started Disc into the CD drive on your Using ActiveSync desktop software
computer. After you install ActiveSync desktop
3 Follow the installation instructions on software, synchronization happens
your computer. automatically anytime you connect your
During installation, you connect your smartphone to your computer, as
smartphone to your computer and sync described in the next section. However,
for the first time. Be sure to watch you can open the ActiveSync window on
what’s happening on both your your computer to do tasks such as the
following:
• Install applications from your computer
to your smartphone (see Installing

72 SETTING UP YOUR COMPUTER FOR SYNCHRONIZATION


SYNCHRONIZING INFORMATION 4

CHAPTER
applications from your computer) or to
an expansion card inserted into the TIP If the ActiveSync icon does not appear in
the taskbar, go to Start, navigate to
expansion card slot on your smartphone
Programs, and then select Microsoft
(see Installing applications onto an
ActiveSync to open the ActiveSync window.
expansion card)
TIP You can enter a setting to have the
• Change which applications synchronize ActiveSync window open automatically when
• Enter settings to synchronize wirelessly you connect your computer and your
with Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 smartphone. On the ActiveSync window,
select File, select Connection Settings, and
then check the Open ActiveSync when my
DID YOU KNOW? You can also change which device connects box.
applications synchronize (see Changing which
applications sync) and enter settings to Desktop software installation also creates
synchronize wirelessly (see Setting up a Mobile Device folder on your computer,
wireless synchronization) in the ActiveSync
which you can see when you open My
app on your smartphone. Whether you enter
changes on your smartphone or your
Computer or Windows Explorer. When
computer, the changes are transferred to the your smartphone is connected to your
other location the next time you synchronize. computer, opening the Mobile Device
folder displays an icon representing your
smartphone. It also displays folders
To open the ActiveSync window,
containing items you synchronized, such as
double-click the ActiveSync icon in the
music files, pictures, and videos.
taskbar in the lower-right corner of your
computer screen.

SETTING UP YOUR COMPUTER FOR SYNCHRONIZATION 73


4
CHAPTER SYNCHRONIZING INFORMATION

Connecting your smartphone to your


TIP For best performance, plug your sync
computer
cable directly into a USB port on your
NOTE If you’re transferring info from a computer. If your computer has USB ports on
previous Windows Mobile® device or from both the front and back, we suggest using the
a Palm OS device, you can learn more
®
back port. If you use a USB hub, make sure it’s
about how to move content, such as a powered hub.
pictures, music, and files, to your
smartphone by going to www.palm.com/ 4 Connect the sync cable to your
treo750-support. smartphone by inserting it into the two
sockets to the left on the bottom of the
1 If international adapters are included in smartphone.
your smartphone package, prepare the 5 Connect the charger cable to the
AC charger by connecting the adapter remaining socket on the bottom of your
that fits the wall outlet you’re going to smartphone.
use.
2 Plug the AC charger into a wall outlet. DID YOU KNOW? The AC charger contains an
indicator light that glows when the charger is
3 Plug the USB sync cable into an
connected to a power source.
available USB port or into a powered
USB hub on your computer.

74 SETTING UP YOUR COMPUTER FOR SYNCHRONIZATION


SYNCHRONIZING INFORMATION 4

CHAPTER
USB sync
cable

This button has no


function with your
smartphone

Synchronizing using connected to your computer and info is


updated in either location.
the sync cable 1 Connect your smartphone to your
computer (see Connecting your
After you install ActiveSync desktop smartphone to your computer). You
software, synchronization takes place should hear the ActiveSync tone.
automatically anytime your smartphone is

SYNCHRONIZING USING THE SYNC CABLE 75


4
CHAPTER SYNCHRONIZING INFORMATION

TIP We recommend that you install the backup


and restore app from the Windows Mobile
Getting Started Disc. A backup and restore
app preserves your data and settings if your
smartphone is ever lost or stolen, and it
protects your data during a hard reset.

Setting up wireless
This button has no
function with your
synchronization
smartphone
Does your company use Microsoft Outlook
2 Look for the ActiveSync icon at the as its email solution? Does your company
top of your smartphone screen and the also use Microsoft Exchange Server 2003
ActiveSync icon in the taskbar on as its email server? If so, you may be able
your computer. to wirelessly synchronize the email and
other Outlook info on your smartphone and
• If you don’t see the ActiveSync icon, the same info stored on the Exchange
make sure the desktop Server using Microsoft Exchange
synchronization software that came ActiveSync.
with your smartphone is running on
your computer. When the Exchange Server is upgraded to
• If you have any problems Service Pack 2, you may be able to take
synchronizing, see Synchronization for advantage of the additional features of
troubleshooting suggestions. Direct Push Technology. Direct Push
Technology is a two-way wireless delivery
method that keeps your Outlook
information always up-to-date and provides

76 SETTING UP WIRELESS SYNCHRONIZATION


SYNCHRONIZING INFORMATION 4

CHAPTER
more efficient communication between the
server and your smartphone. It includes TIP If you installed ActiveSync desktop
software, you may have already set up your
features like Global Address List; Tasks
smartphone to synchronize wirelessly with
Over The Air (OTA); and IP-based push
the server. To check, press Start, select
updating of Calendar, Messaging, and Programs, and then select ActiveSync. Press
Email. Menu (right action key). If Configure Server
appears instead of Add Server Source,
DID YOU KNOW? Because your desktop copy of wireless sync is already set up, and you can
Outlook also syncs with the server, whatever skip this procedure.
is synchronized to the server from your
smartphone also shows up in Outlook; and 1 Press Start and select Programs.
whatever you enter or change in Outlook on
your computer syncs to the server and then 2 Select ActiveSync .
shows up on your smartphone. 3 Press Menu (right action key)
and select Add Server Source.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN To synchronize 4 Enter the server address. Check the box
wirelessly, you need to set up an Exchange if your server uses an encrypted
Server Account. Work with your system connection. Press Next (right
administrator to gather the following info, action key).
and then follow the steps in this section to
set up an account:
• Mail server address and domain name.
• The username and password you use to
access your corporate mail server.
• Security connection: Does your server
use an encrypted (SSL) connection?

SETTING UP WIRELESS SYNCHRONIZATION 77


4
CHAPTER SYNCHRONIZING INFORMATION

5 Enter the username and password you


TIP Ask your system administrator if it is OK to
use to access your corporate mail
store your corporate email password on your
server, and enter the Exchange Server
smartphone (for increased security, you may
domain.
need to enter your password each time you
access your email). If it is not OK, you must
synchronize manually (see Initiating a wireless
sync manually).

7 (Optional) Select Advanced to set the


rules for fixing sync conflicts.
8 Press Next (right action key) and
check the boxes for the types of
information you want to synchronize
with the Exchange Server.
You can’t see your password as you
enter it, so be careful. Be sure Caps
Lock and Option Lock are not on unless
you need them. For info on how to enter
characters, see Entering lowercase and
uppercase letters and Entering
numbers, punctuation, and symbols.

TIPThe Exchange Server settings are case-


sensitive. Be sure to enter uppercase and
lowercase letters properly.
9 (Optional) Highlight one of the items
and select Settings to change the
6 Check the Save password box. synchronization settings for that type

78 SETTING UP WIRELESS SYNCHRONIZATION


SYNCHRONIZING INFORMATION 4

CHAPTER
of information. Settings are not available Setting the synchronization schedule
for all items. You can set a synchronization schedule in
either of the following situations:
TIP To automatically download more of an
incoming email message than the default If your Microsoft Exchange Server 2003
setting, select E-mail in step 9 and increase is upgraded to Service Pack 2: By default,
the KB setting. If you don’t increase this wireless sync takes place anytime info is
setting, you can manually download the rest updated on either your smartphone or the
of the message at your convenience. server using Direct Push Technology. To
save battery life, however, you can set
10 Press Finish (right action key). synchronization to take place at intervals
Synchronization with your Exchange that you specify.
Server begins automatically. A status
If your Microsoft Exchange Server 2003
bar appears onscreen, indicating sync
is not upgraded to Service Pack 2: By
progress.
default, wireless sync does not take place
You can set a schedule for synchronization automatically. Set a synchronization
to take place anytime info is updated on schedule to have sync take place either
either your smartphone or the server or at anytime info is updated on your
certain intervals (see Setting the smartphone or the server, or at certain
synchronization schedule), or allow intervals.
synchronization to take place only when
you initiate it manually (see Initiating a 1 Press Start and select Programs.
wireless sync manually). 2 Select ActiveSync .

SETTING UP WIRELESS SYNCHRONIZATION 79


4
CHAPTER SYNCHRONIZING INFORMATION

3 Press Menu (right action key) Send outgoing items immediately:


and select Schedule. Sets whether items are sent as soon as
you select Send in the Inbox application,
or whether they are held until the next
synchronization.
5 Press OK .

Initiating a wireless sync manually


If you want to control exactly when a
wireless sync takes place, or if it is not OK
to store your corporate email password on
your smartphone, you can initiate sync
4 Set any of the following options: manually.
Peak times: Sets the frequency for 1 To set up manual sync, follow the
high-traffic time periods such as when preceding procedure, Setting the
you are at work or when email volume synchronization schedule. In the Peak
is high. times and Off-peak times lists, select
Off-peak times: Sets the frequency for Manual.
low-traffic time periods such as late at 2 To initiate a manual sync, press Start
night. and select Programs.
Use above settings while roaming: 3 Select ActiveSync .
Sets the frequency while you are 4 Press Sync (left action key).
roaming outside your wireless service
provider’s network. You should keep
this box checked to ensure that wireless
sync works properly.

80 SETTING UP WIRELESS SYNCHRONIZATION


SYNCHRONIZING INFORMATION 4

CHAPTER
Other ways to the lower-right corner of the screen, and
select Connection Settings.
synchronize 2 Check the Allow connections for one
of the following box, and then select
Bluetooth.
Synchronizing over a Bluetooth
connection 3 On your smartphone, press Start
and select Settings.
You can wirelessly synchronize your
computer and smartphone using Bluetooth 4 Select the Connections tab, and then
wireless technology. select Bluetooth .
5 Check the Turn on Bluetooth box to
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Do the following:
turn on the Bluetooth feature on your
• Make sure your computer is equipped smartphone.
with Bluetooth wireless technology.
6 Press Start and select Programs.
• If you did not do so during initial setup,
7 Select ActiveSync .
install the ActiveSync Plug-in for
Bluetooth wireless technology from the 8 Press Menu (right action key)
Windows Mobile Getting Started Disc. and select Connect via Bluetooth.
9 If this is the first time you’re making a
Bluetooth connection to this computer,
TIP To install the plug-in for Bluetooth follow the onscreen prompts to set up a
technology, insert the Windows Mobile Bluetooth partnership with this
Getting Started Disc into your computer’s CD
computer. See Connecting to devices
drive, and then select Add Programs. Select
with Bluetooth® wireless technology for
the plug-in option on the Add Programs
screen and follow the onscreen instructions. more information on partnerships.
10 Select Sync.
1 On your computer, right-click the
ActiveSync icon in the taskbar in

OTHER WAYS TO SYNCHRONIZE 81


4
CHAPTER SYNCHRONIZING INFORMATION

11 When synchronization has finished, Synchronizing with multiple computers


press Menu (right action key) You can set up your smartphone to
and select Disconnect Bluetooth. synchronize with up to two computers as
well as with Exchange Server 2003. When
Synchronizing over an infrared synchronizing with multiple computers, the
connection items that you synchronize appear on all
If your computer has an IR (infrared) port, the computers.
you can synchronize with your computer
For example, if you set up to sync your
wirelessly using the IR port on your
smartphone with two computers named
smartphone.
C1 and C2, when you sync Contacts and
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Calendar on your smartphone with both
• Make sure your computer is equipped computers, you get the following results:
with an IR port. • The contacts and calendar
• Turn on your smartphone’s IR appointments that were on C1 are now
functionality (see Beaming information). also on C2.
1 Set up your computer to receive • The contacts and calendar
infrared beams. See ActiveSync Help on appointments that were on C2 are now
your computer for details. also on C1.
2 Point the IR port directly on your • The contacts and calendar
smartphone at your computer’s IR port. appointments from both computers are
3 On your smartphone, press Start on your device.
and select Programs. NOTE Microsoft Office Outlook E-mail
® ®

4 Select ActiveSync . can synchronize with only one computer.


5 Press Menu (right action key)
and select Connect via IR.
6 Select Sync.

82 OTHER WAYS TO SYNCHRONIZE


SYNCHRONIZING INFORMATION 4

CHAPTER
Setting 4 Do any of the following:
• Check the box next to any items you
synchronization want to synchronize. If you cannot
check a box, you might have to
options uncheck a box for the same
information type elsewhere in the list.
Changing which applications sync • Uncheck the box next to any items
You must select sync options if you want to you want to stop synchronizing.
synchronize notes, pictures, and other • Select an item and then select
types of files. Settings to customize the settings for
that item. Settings are not available
1 Press Start and select Programs. for all items.

Stopping synchronization
If you ever need to manually stop
synchronization, follow these steps:
1 Press Start and select Programs.
2 Select ActiveSync .
3 Press Stop (left action key).

TIPTo stop synchronizing all items on a


2 Select ActiveSync . computer, select the computer name and
then select Delete.
3 Press Menu (right action key)
and select Options.

SETTING SYNCHRONIZATION OPTIONS 83


4
CHAPTER SYNCHRONIZING INFORMATION

84 SETTING SYNCHRONIZATION OPTIONS


CHAP TE R

Your email
You already know how efficient email is for staying in touch.
Now your Palm® Treo™ 750 smartphone brings you a new level
of convenience: email on the go. Enjoy the ease and speed
of communicating with friends, family, and colleagues
anywhere you can access your wireless service provider’s data
network.
You can send photos to your friends and family, or create
Microsoft Word or Excel files and send them to your
colleagues. You can also receive attachments to view and edit
at your convenience.

Benefits
• Receive photos, sound files, Word • Save messages from your
and Excel files, and more computer to view at a convenient
• Attach and send files of almost any time
type
In this chapter
Setting up email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Sending and receiving messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Working with email messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Sending email messages from within another application. . . . . . . . 98
YOUR EMAIL 5

CHAPTER
Setting up email sure that your IT organization has
upgraded your Exchange Server 2003 to
Service Pack 2.
You can use the Inbox application to send
and receive email. Before you use your Entering settings for an email account
smartphone to send or receive messages,
consult your wireless service provider for DID YOU KNOW? You can enter settings for
pricing and availability of email services and more than one email account, and you can
data rate plans. use different email setup applications on your
smartphone to enter settings for different
BEFORE YOU BEGIN accounts, depending on which app best
• Make sure your phone is on before you meets your needs.
send or receive messages.
• If you want delivery of Outlook email
using Direct Push Technology, make

Email account type Type of email you can access How to set up
POP/IMAP You can obtain email from an See Setting up a POP/IMAP
ISP or Internet email account account in the Inbox
such as EarthLink, or from a application.
small business or corporate
Internet email account.

SETTING UP EMAIL 87
5
CHAPTER YOUR EMAIL

Microsoft Exchange You can retrieve corporate See Setting up wireless


Server email using a Microsoft synchronization.
Exchange Server. Wireless
You may need to check with
email access can be supported
your IT organization to ensure
if your company is using
that Exchange ActiveSync® is
Microsoft Exchange
supported and to obtain the
ActiveSync®.
configuration settings.
Hotmail You can view your web-based See Using Pocket MSN.
Hotmail email account using
Pocket MSN on your
smartphone.
Free web-based You can access mail from Access the email website
email Yahoo! and other free directly using your
web-based systems. smartphone’s web browser.

Setting up a POP/IMAP account in the


TIP If you have problems configuring your
Inbox application
account, go to www.palm.com/emailsetup for
You can set up an account in the Inbox more information.
application to send and receive email
messages using an email account that you
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Work with your
have with an Internet service provider
email provider or system administrator to
(ISP), an email account that you access
gather the following info:
using a VPN server connection (such as a
work account; see Connecting to a VPN • Account type (POP3 or IMAP)
(virtual private network)), or any other • Mail server name for receiving mail
IMAP or POP email account. • Mail server name for sending mail
• Your username and password

88 SETTING UP EMAIL
YOUR EMAIL 5

CHAPTER
• Any special security requirements your password each time you access
this account, do not check this box.
1 Go to your Today screen. 8 Press Next (right action key).
2 Press E-mail (left action key). 9 Select the Account type list, and then
3 Press Menu (right action key) select POP3 or IMAP.
and select Tools > New Account.
4 Enter the email address that you want
to set up, and then press Next
(right action key).
5 The setup process searches an online
database to obtain the settings for your
account. Wait until the Status box
displays Completed, and then press
Next (right action key).
If the setup process is able to obtain
account settings, many of the remaining 10 Enter a name for this account, and then
setup screens will be filled in. Check to press Next (right action key). For
make sure that the info on each screen example, if this is your work email
is correct, change it if needed, and then account, enter “Work” or your
press Next (right action key) to company’s name.
move through the screens. 11 Enter the names of the incoming and
outgoing mail servers.
6 Enter your name, username, and
password.
7 If you want your password entered
automatically, check the Save
password box. If you want to enter

SETTING UP EMAIL 89
5
CHAPTER YOUR EMAIL

DID YOU KNOW? On the Accounts tab in


Messaging Options, an asterisk appears next
to the accounts you create.
TIP To delete an email account or to edit
account settings—for example, if you need to
change the name of the outgoing mail
server—press Menu (right action key) and
select Tools > Options. To delete an account,
highlight the account you want press and hold
Center on the 5-way, and then select Delete.
To edit an account, select the account and
NOTE Do not enter anything in Domain. It change the settings you want to edit.
is not needed for POP3 or IMAP accounts.

12 (Optional) Select Options to select


download settings for this account.
Sending and
13 Press Finish (right action key). receiving messages
Creating and sending an email message
1 Go to your Today screen.
2 Press E-mail (left action key).

DID YOU KNOW? You can also access the Inbox


application from the Start menu.

3 Press Left to cycle through your


Inbox accounts until you see the right
email account name in the title bar.

90 SENDING AND RECEIVING MESSAGES


YOUR EMAIL 5

CHAPTER
4 Press New (left action key). 6 Select Subject and enter a title for the
5 Enter the recipient’s email address. message.
Here are some shortcuts: 7 Press Down to go to the body of the
message. Enter your message, or press
Menu (right action key), select
My Text, and then select a predefined
phrase you want to insert.
8 (Optional) Press Menu (right
action key) and select Insert. Select the
type of item you want to attach, and
then select the file or record a voice
note.

TIP You can send an email message with a file


• If the recipient’s name and email attached from directly within other
address are in your Contacts list, applications on your smartphone; see Sending
enter the first few letters of the email messages from within another
recipient’s first or last name, and then application.
select the recipient’s name.
• If the recipient’s name is in an online 9 (Optional) Press Menu (right
address book, you can find the name action key) and do one or both of the
and add it. See Using an online following:
address book. • Select Spell Check. When the spell
check is complete, press OK .
DID YOU KNOW? When addressing a message,
you can enter the contact’s first and last • Select Message Options. Select the
initials separated by a space. Priority list, select a priority setting
for the message, and then press
OK .

SENDING AND RECEIVING MESSAGES 91


5
CHAPTER YOUR EMAIL

10 Press Send (left action key).


TIP If you sync email with Microsoft Exchange
Server 2003, you can synchronize messages
TIP To save memory on your smartphone, turn
in subfolders you create. In the Inbox, press
off the option to save sent messages in the
Menu (right action key) and select Tools >
Saved folder. In the Inbox, press Menu (right
Manage Folders. Folders containing
action key) and select Tools > Options. Select
subfolders display a +. Select the + to view
Message, and then uncheck the Keep copies
the subfolders. Check the box to the left of
of sent items in Sent folder box.
any subfolder you want to sync.

Receiving email messages


• If you use ActiveSync desktop software
How you receive email messages depends to synchronize your smartphone with
on the type of account you are using and your computer, messages in Outlook on
how you synchronize: your computer are transferred to your
• If you synchronize wirelessly with your smartphone when you connect your
Exchange Server using Microsoft computer and your smartphone (see
Exchange ActiveSync, new email Connecting your smartphone to your
messages are sent to your smartphone computer).
when they appear on the server, • For all other types of accounts,
according to the schedule you set up including ISP accounts and accounts
(see Setting the synchronization you access using a VPN server
schedule), or when you manually initiate connection (typically a work account;
a sync (see Initiating a wireless sync see Connecting to a VPN (virtual private
manually. network), follow these steps to send
and receive messages:
1 Go to your Today screen.
2 Press E-mail (left action key).
3 Press Left to cycle through your
accounts until the name of the account

92 SENDING AND RECEIVING MESSAGES


YOUR EMAIL 5

CHAPTER
you want to synchronize appears in If you are synchronizing with Outlook on
the title bar. your computer and want to download
4 Press Menu (right action key) attachments automatically, do the
and select Send/Receive to following:
synchronize your smartphone with your 1 Press Start and select Programs.
email server.
2 Select ActiveSync .
Receiving attachments 3 Press Menu (right action key)
and select Options.
1 Scroll to the attachment name (below
the subject) to highlight it and mark it 4 Select E-mail, and then select
for download. Settings.
2 Synchronize the email account that 5 Check the Include file attachments
contains the message as described in box.
the previous sections. 6 Press OK .
3 Scroll to and select the attachment To automatically download attachments
name (below the subject) to open the from an IMAP4 email account (typically an
attachment. ISP account) or an account that you access
using a VPN server connection (typically a
DID YOU KNOW? You can receive and open work account; see Connecting to a VPN
attachments in a number of different formats, (virtual private network), do the following:
including PDF. PDF file attachments open in
Picsel PDF Viewer on your smartphone. 1 Go to your Today screen.
TIPTo store attachments on an expansion 2 Press E-mail (left action key).
card, press Menu (right action key) and select 3 Close any open messages.
Tools > Options. Select Storage and then
check the Store attachments on a storage 4 Press Menu (right action key)
card box. and select Tools > Options.

SENDING AND RECEIVING MESSAGES 93


5
CHAPTER YOUR EMAIL

5 On the Accounts tab, select the IMAP4 to verify names that you enter in the To,
account name. Cc, and Bcc fields.
6 Press Next (right action key) until BEFORE YOU BEGIN Do the following:
you reach Server information, and then
• Ask your system administrator for the
select Options.
name of the directory service and the
7 Press Next twice, and then select Get server, and whether authentication is
full copy of messages and When required for accessing an online address
getting full copy, get attachments. book.
• If your company is using an Exchange
DID YOU KNOW? Embedded images and objects
cannot be received as attachments, unless
Server, you must first synchronize with
you have an IMAP4 email account with TNEF the Exchange Server to enable the
disabled. Note that TNEF must be enabled to Global Address List to find a Contact.
receive meeting requests.
1 In the message list, press Menu
(right action key) and select Tools >
Working with email Options.
2 Select the Address tab.
messages 3 Select the address book you want to
check for email addresses, and then
Adding an online address book select Add.
Many email servers, including servers 4 Enter the name of the Directory service.
running Exchange Server, can verify names 5 Enter the server name.
with an online address book, also called a 6 If your server requires authentication,
directory service or a Global Address List. check the box, and then enter your
After you create and enable an email username and password.
account, the Inbox application checks your
contacts list and then the directory service

94 WORKING WITH EMAIL MESSAGES


YOUR EMAIL 5

CHAPTER
7 (Optional) Check the Check name BEFORE YOU BEGIN Add an online
against this server box to enable this address book to your smartphone (see
directory service. Adding an online address book).
8 Select OK.
1 In a new message, tap the To box.
TIP To delete a directory service, highlight it, 2 Press Menu (right action key),
press and hold Center on the 5-way, and then and select Add Recipient.
select Delete.
3 Press Menu (right action key),
and select Find Online.
Using an online address book
4 Enter the contact name as it appears in
You can access contact information, such the directory and tap Find. You must
as an email address or phone number, from spell the contact name correctly.
your organization’s online address book or
Global Address List (GAL). To access a TIP When you sync with Outlook on your
GAL, make sure you are accessing an computer, disable your online address books
Exchange Server 2003 upgraded to Service to avoid errors. Press Menu (right action key)
Pack 2. This feature is useful only if you and select Tools > Options. Select Address,
know the exact name as it appears in the select each online address book, and then
directory. uncheck the Check name against this server
box. Be sure to turn this option back on if you
synchronize other email accounts.
DID YOU KNOW? You can use the Global
Address List to find a contact. In Contacts,
press Menu (right action key), and then select Forwarding a message
Find Online. When sending a meeting 1 Open the message you want to
request, select Attendees, press Menu (right forward.
action key), and then select Find Online.
2 Press Menu (right action key)
and select Forward.

WORKING WITH EMAIL MESSAGES 95


5
CHAPTER YOUR EMAIL

3 Address the message and enter any 6 (Optional) Check the box to add this
text you want to add. signature to messages you reply to or
4 Press Send (left action key). forward with this account.
7 Highlight the text “Enter a signature
Adding a signature to your messages here” and enter the signature text you
You can use a different signature with each want to use.
email account. 8 Press OK .
1 Press E-mail (left action key).
Customizing your email settings
2 Press Menu (right action key)
When you customize settings for an email
and select Tools > Options.
account, the options you choose apply to
3 On the Accounts tab, select that account only.
Signatures.
1 Press E-mail (left action key).
4 Select the account for which you want
to create a signature. 2 Press Left to cycle through your
accounts until the name of the account
you want appears in the title bar.
3 Press Menu (right action key)
and select Tools > Options.
4 Select the Message tab and set any of
the following options:

5 Check the box to add this signature to


new messages you create with this
account.

96 WORKING WITH EMAIL MESSAGES


YOUR EMAIL 5

CHAPTER
When replying to e-mail, include Verify names using these address
body: Indicates whether the body of a books: Indicates which directory
message you received appears in your services you want to check for email
response to that message. addresses.
Keep copies of sent items in Sent Add: Enables you to add directory
folder: Indicates whether messages services to the list of online address
you send are stored in the Sent folder. books.
After deleting or moving a message: 6 Select the Storage tab and set any of
Specifies what you want to see after the following options:
you delete or move an email message. Store attachments on storage card:
5 Select the Address tab and set any of Indicates whether you want to
the following options: automatically store email attachments
on an expansion card.
In Contacts, get e-mail addresses
from: Indicates whether you want to
check Contacts in addition to any
directory services for email addresses.

WORKING WITH EMAIL MESSAGES 97


5
CHAPTER YOUR EMAIL

Sending email
messages from
within another
application
You can send files such as pictures, videos,
and ringtones as attachments to email
Empty deleted items: Indicates messages (see Creating and sending an
whether you want to automatically email message).
empty the Deleted folder, and when you
You can send certain files as attachments
want this to occur.
from within the application where the file is
7 Press OK . created or stored. For example, if you take
a picture with the built-in camera on your
smartphone, you can select an option to
send the picture as an attachment to an
email message. This feature can be used
with videos and sound files as well. For
details, see the chapter on the specific
application.

98 SENDING EMAIL MESSAGES FROM WITHIN ANOTHER APPLICATION


CHAP TE R

6
Your text and multimedia
messages
If you need to get a short message to a friend or a co-worker
fast, send a text message from your Palm® Treo™ 750
smartphone to their mobile phone or email address.
If you need more than text to express yourself, use multimedia
messaging to give your message extra impact by adding a
photo, video, or sound file.

Benefits
• Enjoy quick communication • Be as simple or as creative as you
• Use text messaging to chat with want
friends
In this chapter
Using the Messaging application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Customizing the Messaging application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Using Pocket MSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
YOUR TEXT AND MULTIMEDIA MESSAGES 6

CHAPTER
Using the Messaging 1 Press Start
2 Press New
and select Messaging.
(left action key).
application 3 Enter the recipient’s mobile phone
number or email address. Here are
You can use the Messaging application to some shortcuts:
send and receive brief text messages
(SMS) and multimedia messages (MMS).
Before you use your smartphone to send or
receive messages, consult your wireless
service provider for pricing and availability
of text and multimedia messaging
services.

Creating and sending a text message


Each text message can have up to 160
characters. You can send a message of • If the recipient’s name and mobile
more than 160 characters, but the number are in your Contacts list, type
message will automatically be split into the first few letters of the first or last
several messages. If you send a text name or simply enter the first initial,
message to an email address, the email followed by a space, and then the last
address is deducted from the initial to find a name.
160-character count. • Press Center to view a list of
recently used addresses, and select
DID YOU KNOW? You can send and receive text the recipient from the list. Select Add
messages even while you are on a phone call. Recipient to add a recipient from your
This is easiest when using a hands-free Contacts list.
headset or the speakerphone.

USING THE MESSAGING APPLICATION 101


6
CHAPTER YOUR TEXT AND MULTIMEDIA MESSAGES

• If the recipient’s name is in an online


TIP You can also access predefined phrases
address book, press Center ,
and emoticons by pressing Menu (right action
enter the name, press Menu
key) on the message compose screen.
(right action key), and then select Find
TIP Some symbols can’t be used in text
Online. Select the name, and then
messages. Invalid characters are automatically
select either the phone number or the
replaced by the Messaging application.
email address. For more information,
see Using an online address book.
6 Press Send (left action key).
• If the recipient’s name and mobile
number are not in your Contacts list,
Creating and sending a multimedia
enter the full mobile number or email
message
address.
Multimedia messages consist of pictures,
TIP To address a message to multiple videos, text, and sounds presented as one
recipients, separate the addresses by or more slides. You can include any of the
pressing Enter or entering a semicolon (;). You following items:
can send a message to up to 20 addresses.
Ringtones
TIP To send a message to a different number
• MIDI
for a contact, select the contact in the To field,
and then edit the number that appears in the Sound clips
box directly below the contact number. You • AMR
can also select a number by pressing Center
• QCELP
on the 5-way, and then edit it.
Pictures
4 Enter your message, or tap and • JPEG

then select a predefined phrase you • GIF


want to insert. • WBMP
5 (Optional) Tap and then select an Videos
emoticon to add to your message. • 3GPP

102 USING THE MESSAGING APPLICATION


YOUR TEXT AND MULTIMEDIA MESSAGES 6

CHAPTER
• 3GPP2 followed by a space, and then the last
• MPEG4 initial to find a name.
• Press Center to view a list of
Outgoing multimedia messages can be up
recently used addresses, and select
to 300KB by default, but your wireless
the recipient from the list. Select Add
service provider may change the maximum
Recipient to add a recipient from your
message size.
Contacts list.
1 Press Start and select Messaging. • If the recipient’s name is in an online
2 Press Menu (right action key) address book, press Center ,
and select New MMS. enter the name, press Menu
(right action key), and then select Find
Online. Select the name, and then
select either the phone number or the
email address. For more information,
see Using an online address book.
• If the recipient’s name and mobile
number are not in your Contacts list,
enter the full mobile number or email
address.
4 Select Subject and enter a title for the
3 Enter the recipient’s mobile phone message.
number or email address. Here are 5 Select and select one of the
some shortcuts: following:
• If the recipient’s name and mobile Add Picture: Enables you to insert a
number are in your Contacts list, type picture. You can take a new picture with
the first few letters of the first or last the built-in camera or insert an existing
name or simply enter the first initial, picture.

USING THE MESSAGING APPLICATION 103


6
CHAPTER YOUR TEXT AND MULTIMEDIA MESSAGES

Add Video: Enables you to insert a


video. You can capture a new video with DID YOU KNOW? If you add more than one slide
to a message, you can set the length of time
the built-in camera or insert an existing
each slide is displayed. Press Menu (right
video clip.
action key) and select Slide Timing.
Add Sound: Enables you to record a
message, such as a voice caption for a 8 (Optional) To add a vCard (contact file)
picture, or insert an existing sound, such to a message, press Menu (left
as a ringtone. You can add one sound action key), select Add Media, and then
per slide; to send more than one sound select Add vCard.
in a message, add another slide to your
message. TIP To preview a multimedia message as the
recipient will see it, press Menu (right action
TIP You can add both a picture and a sound key) and then select Preview Message.
clip to the same slide in a message. To add a
sound to a picture, select the picture 9 Press Send (left action key).
thumbnail and select Add Sound. To add a
picture to a sound, select the sound icon and Setting message options
select Add Picture.
You can set options for individual text and
multimedia messages you send.
6 (Optional) Select Add Text and enter a
text caption or message for the slide
you inserted. Tap to insert a DID YOU KNOW? You can set general
preferences that apply to all incoming and
predefined phrase. Tap to insert an
outgoing messages (see Customizing
emoticon. message settings). If you set options for an
7 (Optional) Select Add slide and repeat individual message, those options override
steps 5–6 to add another slide in this your general preferences for that message
message. only.

104 USING THE MESSAGING APPLICATION


YOUR TEXT AND MULTIMEDIA MESSAGES 6

CHAPTER
1 On the message compose screen, hour, you can set the validity for one
press Menu . hour.
2 Select Message Options. Message Priority (multimedia
3 Select any of the following options messages only): Indicates the priority
for this message.
4 Press OK .

Receiving text and multimedia messages


When your phone is on and you are in a
wireless coverage area, you automatically
receive new text messages. For
multimedia messages, you can set your
smartphone to automatically download
new messages or to notify you that
Request Delivery/Read Receipt messages are ready to download. You can
(multimedia messages only): also set your smartphone to notify you
Indicates whether you want to receive when a new text or multimedia message
confirmation that the message has arrives.
been delivered or has been read.
Validity Period: Indicates how long the DID YOU KNOW? Message notifications include
message remains available to be sent if the message text unless you have turned on
the recipient’s phone or email address is privacy mode (see Customizing message
settings). If privacy mode is on, the
not available when you originally send
notification states only the type of incoming
the message. For example, if a message.
message contains information that will
not be useful to the recipient after an

USING THE MESSAGING APPLICATION 105


6
CHAPTER YOUR TEXT AND MULTIMEDIA MESSAGES

The new message notification may include Viewing/playing a message


any of the following options: You can open a message from a
• Go To: Opens a text message so you notification or from the Inbox of the
can view its full contents. Messaging application. When you open a
multimedia message, playback starts
• View: Opens a multimedia message
automatically.
and plays the included media.
• Download: Downloads the full content 1 Do one of the following to open the
of a multimedia message. message:
• Dismiss: Closes the notification and • Press Start and select
puts the message into your Inbox. Messaging. From the Inbox, select
the message you want to view.
• From a notification, select Go To (for
text messages) or View (for
multimedia messages).
2 Do any of the following:
Pause or resume playback
(multimedia message only):
Select Pause (left action key). To
resume playback, select Play (left
action key).
If you have multiple messages, the
notification includes the number of
messages and the type (text or
multimedia).

106 USING THE MESSAGING APPLICATION


YOUR TEXT AND MULTIMEDIA MESSAGES 6

CHAPTER
Forward the message: Press Menu
(right action key) and select
Forward.
Call the sender: Press Menu
(right action key) and select Call
Sender.
Add the sender’s information to your
Contacts list: Press Menu (right
action key) and select Add to Contacts.
Save the item that is playing Save the message as a template for
(multimedia message only): Press other messages: Press Menu
Menu (right action key) and (right action key) and select Save as
select Save. Template.
See a summary of the message,
including sender, date, and time: DID YOU KNOW? When viewing a multimedia
Press Menu (right action key) message containing multiple slides, you can
and select Message Details. press Right on the 5-way to move to the next
slide, or press Left on the 5-way to move to
Reply to the message: Press Menu the previous slide.
(right action key) and select
Reply or Reply All. 3 Press OK .
NOTE If the message is a single picture
with no audio, select Reply (left Using Messaging to chat
action key) to reply to the message. When you exchange more than one
message with a single contact, the
messages you exchange with that person
are grouped into a chat session. When you

USING THE MESSAGING APPLICATION 107


6
CHAPTER YOUR TEXT AND MULTIMEDIA MESSAGES

select a chat session from your message 5 In a received message, select to


list, the upper part of the screen displays all open a media file, or click a link to
messages you’ve exchanged with this download and open a new multimedia
contact, and the lower part provides a text message.
entry area.
TIP Only the last 50 messages in a chat
1 Press Start and select Messaging. session are displayed. Select View older
messages near the top of the screen to see
earlier messages.

Using links in messages


When you receive a text message that
contains a telephone number, email
address, or URL, you can dial the number,
send an email message, or go to the web
page immediately. Your smartphone
automatically opens the appropriate
2 Do one of the following: application from the link.
Start a new chat: Select a message 1 Open a message in the Inbox or another
and reply to it. folder.
Continue an existing chat: Select a 2 Select the phone number, email
message with the Chat icon. address, or URL (appears as underlined
blue text).
3 Enter your message.
4 Press Send (left action key).

108 USING THE MESSAGING APPLICATION


YOUR TEXT AND MULTIMEDIA MESSAGES 6

CHAPTER
Message status icons Sorting your messages
The status icons that appear next to each You can sort the messages in any folder by
message in the Inbox, Outbox, and Sent date or by sender.
folders indicate the following:
1 Go to the Inbox or other folder you want
An unread text message. to sort.
2 Press Menu (right action key)
An unread message with pictures or
and select Sort.
videos.
3 Select By Name or By Date.
An unread message with sound.

A read text message. Deleting a single message


1 Go to the Inbox or other folder
A read message with pictures or containing the message you want to
videos. delete.
A read message with sound. 2 Highlight the message.

A message that was delivered with 3 Press Menu (right action key)
delivery confirmation turned on and select Delete.
(Sent folder only). 4 Select Yes to confirm the deletion.
Multiple messages exchanged with
Deleting multiple messages
a single recipient (chat).
1 Go to the Inbox or other folder
An urgent message. This icon
containing the messages you want to
appears below the message size on
delete.
the right side of the screen.
2 Press Menu (right action key)
and select Purge.
Unread messages appear in bold.
TIP
Messages you’ve read appear in plain text.

USING THE MESSAGING APPLICATION 109


6
CHAPTER YOUR TEXT AND MULTIMEDIA MESSAGES

3 Select the age of messages to be 3 On the Messages tab, set any of the
deleted, or select Delete all messages following options:
to delete all messages.

Confirm message deletions: Indicates


4 Select Purge (left action key). whether you want deletion confirmation
messages to appear.
Automatically download MMS
Customizing the messages: Indicates whether you want
to automatically receive multimedia
Messaging messages. Check the Even when
application roaming box to download multimedia
messages both on your home network
and while roaming.
Customizing message settings
NOTE You might incur additional charges if
1 Press Start and select Messaging. you download multimedia messages while
2 Press Menu (right action key) roaming.
and select Options.

110 CUSTOMIZING THE MESSAGING APPLICATION


YOUR TEXT AND MULTIMEDIA MESSAGES 6

CHAPTER
Message validity period: Indicates 3 Select the Chat tab.
how long messages remain available to
be sent if the recipient’s phone or email
address is not available when you
originally send the message. For
example, if your messages generally
contain information that will not be
useful to recipients after an hour, you
can set the validity for one hour.
Signature: Enables you to add a
signature to outgoing messages. Select
the button; then, on the Signature 4 Select either of the following options:
screen, check the Use signatures with Create chat from messages: Indicates
new messages box, enter your the conditions under which a chat
signature text, and then press OK . session starts.
4 Press OK . Show time stamps of each message:
Indicates whether you want chat
DID YOU KNOW? Options you select for an
session items to display a date and time
individual message (see Setting message
indicator.
options) override the general preferences you
set for all messages. 5 Press OK .

Customizing chat settings Customizing notification settings


1 Press Start and select Messaging. 1 Press Start and select Messaging.
2 Press Menu (right action key) 2 Press Menu (right action key)
and select Options. and select Options.

CUSTOMIZING THE MESSAGING APPLICATION 111


6
CHAPTER YOUR TEXT AND MULTIMEDIA MESSAGES

3 Select the Notification tab. 5 Press OK .

Customizing network settings


IMPORTANT Changing the network
settings can cause the Messaging
application to stop working correctly. We
recommend that you keep the default
network settings.

1 Press Start and select Messaging.


2 Press Menu (right action key)
4 Select any of the following options: and select Options.
Request MMS receipts: Indicates 3 Select the Advanced tab.
whether you want to receive a
confirmation when a multimedia
message is delivered or when it is read.
Privacy mode (hide text): Indicates
whether you want only the message
type displayed on a notification for a
single incoming message. If the box is
unchecked, the notification displays the
text of the message.
Acknowledge when messages are
received/read: Indicates whether you 4 Select Manual, and then select Edit.
want a confirmation sent to the sender 5 Edit the network settings you want to
when you receive or read a multimedia change.
message.

112 CUSTOMIZING THE MESSAGING APPLICATION


YOUR TEXT AND MULTIMEDIA MESSAGES 6

CHAPTER
BEFORE YOU BEGIN You must subscribe
TIP Select Automatic on the Advanced tab to to data services from your wireless service
restore the default settings.
provider. You must also have a Windows
Live ID (formerly Passport) account or a
6 Press OK twice. Hotmail account. If you do not have either
of these accounts, do the following:
• To create a Windows Live ID account,
Using Pocket MSN go to www.passport.com.
• To create a Hotmail account, go to
Pocket MSN provides quick access to the www.hotmail.com.
following:
TIPWhen you set up a Pocket MSN Hotmail
• MSN Hotmail: Enables you to read, account, you can access that account in the
write, send, and delete email. You can Inbox application. To access your instant
also manage your Hotmail folders. messages, use the MSN application or the
• MSN Messenger: Enables you to see MSN plug-in on the Today screen.
who’s online and exchange instant
messages (IM). Subscribe to status Signing in to Pocket MSN
updates for selected contacts so you’re 1 Press Start and select Programs.
notified when they’re online. 2 Select Pocket MSN.
• Options: Enables you to customize your
Pocket MSN experience.

DID YOU KNOW? You can add Pocket MSN to


your Today screen. See Selecting which items
appear on your Today screen for details.

USING POCKET MSN 113


6
CHAPTER YOUR TEXT AND MULTIMEDIA MESSAGES

5 Enter the email address and password


for your Windows Live ID account or
your Hotmail account.

3 Select MSN Mobile Home.


4 Select Sign in.

114 USING POCKET MSN


CHAP TE R

7
Your connections to the web
and wireless devices
You use the web for so many things: finding driving directions,
getting news, buying gifts, checking web-based email. Now, with
your wireless service provider’s network and your smartphone’s
built-in web browser, you can take the web with you almost
anywhere you go.
The built-in Bluetooth® wireless technology on your Palm® Treo™
750 smartphone helps you easily set up wireless connections to
a number of devices, so you can enjoy the convenience of
cable-free connectivity. You can also use your smartphone to
connect your computer to the Internet and to share contacts or
your favorite photos with other people.
Benefits
• Carry the web with you • Connect to Bluetooth headsets
• Store web pages for offline and car kits
viewing • Connect your computer to the
Internet through your smartphone
In this chapter
Browsing the web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Connecting to devices with Bluetooth® wireless technology. . . . . . 124
Using your device as a wireless modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES 7

CHAPTER
Browsing the web • Make sure your phone is on (see
Turning your Palm® Treo™ 750
smartphone on/off).
Internet Explorer Mobile provides quick and
easy access to web pages. You can view Viewing a web page
most sites you use on your computer,
By default, Internet Explorer Mobile scales
including those with security and advanced
web page content to fit your smartphone
features, such as JavaScript and frames.
screen so that you can view most of the
Internet Explorer Mobile supports information without scrolling left or right.
JavaScript, Secure Sockets Layer (SSL),
and cookies, but does not support plug-ins DID YOU KNOW? You can also start a web
(Flash, Shockwave, VBScript, WML script, search from your Today screen by selecting
and so on) or Java applets. the Web search field, entering the item you
want to find, and then pressing Center on the
5-way.
DID YOU KNOW? The security certificates and
128-bit SSL strong encryption enable you to
browse secure sites, such as online shopping, 1 Press Start and select Internet
banking, and email. Remember, some secure Explorer.
sites also require a specific browser and may
not work with Internet Explorer Mobile. Ask
the organization for an alternate access point
that is compatible with Internet Explorer
Mobile.

BEFORE YOU BEGIN Do the following:


• Be sure to subscribe to data services
from your wireless service provider.
This is necessary for browsing the web.

BROWSING THE WEB 117


7
CHAPTER YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES

2 Highlight the address line, enter the Default: Maintains a layout similar to
address of the web page you want to what you see on a desktop computer,
view, and then press Center . To but it makes items smaller and arranges
return to a recently viewed page, select the content so that you can see most of
the address line list, and then select the it without scrolling horizontally.
web address.
Desktop: Keeps the same layout and
size as on a desktop computer, which
DID YOU KNOW? If you browse to a secure web
page, the lock icon in the address line appears
requires both horizontal and vertical
closed instead of open. scrolling.
Full Screen: Hides the status and
navigation areas and fills the entire
screen with the web page. To exit full
screen mode, press (right action
key), or tap and hold anywhere on the
screen and uncheck Full Screen.
Show Pictures: Shows or hides
pictures on web pages. Hiding pictures
speeds up the time it takes to load
pages.
4 Here are some tips on viewing web
3 Press Menu (right action key),
pages and moving around in them:
select View, and then select one of the
following: • To view the previous page, press
Back (left action key) or
One Column: Arranges web pages into
Backspace .
one column that is as wide as the
screen, so that you don’t have to scroll • To refresh the page with the latest
horizontally. content from the Internet, press

118 BROWSING THE WEB


YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES 7

CHAPTER
Menu (right action key) and • To view each item in a list, select the
select Refresh. list and scroll using Up or
• To scroll through the page in One Down .
Column View or Default View, press • In a list, press Left or Right to
Up or Down . In Desktop View, cycle between items, and then press
press Up , Down , Left , or Center to accept the change.
Right to scroll in all directions. • In a form, such as a browser search
• To follow a link to another web page, field, press Center to interact
press Up or Down to highlight with the form, and then press Center
the link, and then press Center to to stop interacting with the form.
go to the selected page. You can also 5 Press OK to close Internet Explorer
tap the link on the screen with the Mobile.
stylus.
• To send email from a web page, TIP To send a link, press Menu and select
select the address link. You need to Tools > Send Link via E-mail. Select the
configure an email application on your email account you want to use to send the
smartphone before you can use this link.
feature (see Your email).
• To adjust the size of the text on web Creating a favorite
pages, press Menu (right Favorites let you bookmark a web page so
action key), select Zoom, and then that you can instantly access it without
select the size you want. entering the web address.
• To view a web page’s properties, BEFORE YOU BEGIN Create the folders
press Menu (right action key) where you want to store your favorites
and select Tools > Properties. first. After you create a favorite, you can’t
move it to another folder (see Organizing
your favorites).

BROWSING THE WEB 119


7
CHAPTER YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES

1 Go to the page you want to mark as Viewing a favorite


a favorite. 1 Press Start and select Internet
2 Press Menu (right action key) Explorer.
and select Add to Favorites. 2 Press Favorites (left action key).
3 Select the page you want to view in the
list.

Organizing your favorites


You can create folders to organize your
favorites. For example, you can store travel
links in one folder, stock links in another,
and business links in a third folder.
1 Press Start and select Internet
3 (Optional) Select Name and enter a Explorer.
different description. 2 Press Menu (right action key)
4 (Optional) Select the folder where you and select Favorites.
want to create the favorite. 3 Select the Add/Delete tab.
5 Select Add. 4 Select New Folder.
5 Enter a name for this folder, and then
TIP To delete a favorite or folder, press Menu select Add.
and select Favorites. Select the Add/Delete
tab, highlight the item you want to delete, and 6 Press OK .
then select Delete. Select Yes to confirm
deletion and press OK.

120 BROWSING THE WEB


YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES 7

CHAPTER
Downloading files and images from a web
page DID YOU KNOW? You can access specially
formatted streaming content by pressing
You can download files that are usable on Menu (right action key), selecting Favorites,
your smartphone, such as new and then selecting WindowsMedia.com.
applications, MIDI ringtones, or pictures.
Copying text from a web page
DID YOU KNOW? You can select the
You can copy text from a web page and
(Downloads) favorite to access your wireless
service provider’s downloads page.
paste it in other applications.

TIPYou can copy the text from the entire web


1 Go to the page that contains the link to
page. Tap and hold on the page, and then tap
the file you want to download.
Select All Text. Tap and hold on the page
2 Press Left or Right to highlight the again, and then tap Copy.
link to the file.
3 Press and hold Center , and then 1 Use the stylus to highlight the text you
select Save As to download a file, or want to copy.
tap and hold, and then select Save 2 Press Menu (right action key)
Image to download an image. and select Edit > Copy.
4 Select Name and enter a new name for 3 Go to the application in which you want
the file. to paste, and then position the cursor
5 Select the Folder list, and then select where you want to paste the text.
the folder where you want to save the 4 Press Menu (right action key)
file. and select Edit > Paste.
6 Select the Location list, and then select
where you want to store the file: Main
memory or Storage card.
7 Press OK .

BROWSING THE WEB 121


7
CHAPTER YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES

TIPIf Internet Explorer Mobile does not


recognize a phone number as dialable, you
can copy the phone number (as text) and
paste it into the phone Dial Pad.

Returning to recently viewed pages


The History list stores the addresses of the
pages you visited recently.
1 Press Menu (right action key)
and select History. Home Page: Sets the page that appears
2 (Optional) Select the Show list in the when you open Internet Explorer
upper-left, and then select how you Mobile. To use the page you were on
want to sort the History list. when you opened the menu, select Use
3 Select the web page you want to view. Current. To select the original home
page, select Use Default.
Customizing your Internet Explorer Encoding: Sets the character set for
Mobile settings the web pages you view.
1 Press Menu (right action key)
and select Tools > Options.
2 On the General tab, set any of the
following options:

122 BROWSING THE WEB


YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES 7

CHAPTER
3 Select the Memory tab and set any of
the following options:

Clear Cookies: Deletes any cookies


stored on your smartphone.
Save links to pages visited in the Warn when changing to a page that
past: Sets how many days of activity is not secure: Sets whether a message
the History list stores. appears when you switch from a secure
Clear History: Empties the History list. page to one that is not secure.

Delete Files: Removes web files that Warn when page content is blocked
you previously viewed synchronized due to security settings: Sets whether
with your computer. a message appears when you attempt
to open a page that does not meet the
4 Select the Security tab and set any of security standards associated with your
the following options: smartphone.
Allow cookies: Sets whether your
5 Press OK .
smartphone accepts cookies (small files
containing info about your identity and
preferences). The page sends the file
and stores it on your smartphone.

BROWSING THE WEB 123


7
CHAPTER YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES

Connecting to in ideal conditions. Performance and range


are affected by physical obstacles, radio
devices with interference from nearby electronic
equipment, and other factors.
Bluetooth ®

When you configure a headset (see


wireless technology Connecting to a Bluetooth® hands-free
device), the headset is automatically added
to your trusted device list. Follow the steps
With the built-in Bluetooth wireless
®
in this section to add other devices to your
technology on your smartphone, you can trusted device list, such as your computer.
connect to a number of Bluetooth devices
such as a headset or hands-free car kit, as DID YOU KNOW? Check your battery level before
well as to other phones, handhelds, or establishing a Bluetooth connection. If the
piconets. When you connect to another battery level is low, you can’t make a
device, you create a partnership (also Bluetooth connection.
referred to by terms such as trusted pair,
trusted device, or pairing) with that device. Entering basic Bluetooth settings
If your computer is enabled with Bluetooth
1 Go to your Today screen, and then tap
wireless technology, you can also
Bluetooth .
synchronize wirelessly or use your phone
as a wireless modem.
You can create a list of Bluetooth devices
that you trust to communicate with your
smartphone. When communicating with
trusted devices, your smartphone skips the
discovery process and creates a secure link
as long as the device is within range.
Bluetooth range is up to 10 meters (30 feet)

124 CONNECTING TO DEVICES WITH BLUETOOTH® WIRELESS TECHNOLOGY


YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES 7

CHAPTER
2 Check the Turn on Bluetooth box to the basic Bluetooth settings as described
turn on the Bluetooth feature on your in Entering basic Bluetooth settings.
smartphone.
3 Check or uncheck the Make the device 1 Go to your Today screen and tap
discoverable to other devices box. Bluetooth .
Check this box to allow Bluetooth 2 Check the Turn on Bluetooth box to
devices that are not on your Trusted turn on the Bluetooth feature on your
Device list to request a connection with smartphone.
your device. Your device remains 3 Select the Devices tab, and then select
accessible to other devices until you New Partnership.
uncheck the box.

DID YOU KNOW? The Bluetooth icon on your


Today screen indicates the status of the
Bluetooth feature:
Gray = Bluetooth off.
Blue = Bluetooth on.
White = Connected to a Bluetooth device.
Headset = Call in progress with a Bluetooth
headset or car kit.

Requesting a connection with another


Bluetooth device
BEFORE YOU BEGIN To prepare your
smartphone to be able to accept a
connection from a requesting device, enter

CONNECTING TO DEVICES WITH BLUETOOTH® WIRELESS TECHNOLOGY 125


7
CHAPTER YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES

then press Next (right action


KEY TERM Partnership Two devices—for key).
example, your smartphone and a hands-free
device—that can connect because each IMPORTANT Some hands-free devices
device finds the same passkey on the other have a predefined passkey; if so, you can
device. After you form a partnership with a find the passkey in the documentation for
device, you don’t need to enter a passkey to that device. Other devices provide a screen
connect with that device again. Partnership is
where you enter a passkey that you make
also known as paired relationship, pairing,
up. In either case, you must use the same
trusted device, and trusted pair.
passkey on both your smartphone and the
other device. We recommend that where
4 Wait for your smartphone to search for possible, you make up a passkey of 16
devices and to display the device list. alphanumeric characters (letters and
numerals only) to improve the security of
your smartphone. The longer the passkey,
the more difficult it is for the passkey to be
deciphered.

7 If the passkey is not built-in, enter the


same passkey on the other Bluetooth
device, and then press Finish
(right action key).
8 If you’re connecting to a headset or
5 Select the device with which you want hands-free car kit, check the Hands
to connect, and then press Next Free box, and then press Finish
(right action key). (right action key).
6 Enter an alphanumeric passkey 9 Press OK .
between 1 and 16 characters long, and You can now communicate with this device
whenever it is within range and the

126 CONNECTING TO DEVICES WITH BLUETOOTH® WIRELESS TECHNOLOGY


YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES 7

CHAPTER
Bluetooth feature on your smartphone is 3 If you have already set up a partnership
turned on. The range varies greatly with the transmitting device, your
depending on environmental factors. The smartphone is ready to receive the info.
maximum is about 10 meters (30 feet). If you haven’t set up a connection,
check the Make this device
TIP To delete the established partnership with discoverable to other devices box to
a device, go to the Bluetooth Settings screen let the device find your smartphone and
and select Devices. Highlight the connection request a connection. Enter the same
you want to remove, press and hold Center passkey on your smartphone and on the
on the 5-way, and then select Delete. The
Bluetooth device.
deleted device can no longer automatically
connect with your smartphone. 4 When your smartphone is receiving
info, a notification tells you that a
Accepting a connection from another transmission is in progress. To stop the
Bluetooth device transmission, press Cancel (left
action key). To close the notification,
BEFORE YOU BEGIN To prepare your press Dismiss (right action key).
smartphone to be able to accept a
connection from a requesting device, enter
the basic Bluetooth settings as described
in Entering basic Bluetooth settings. Using your device as
1 Go to your Today screen and tap
a wireless modem
Bluetooth .
2 Check the Turn on Bluetooth box to Dial-up networking (DUN) is the feature
turn on the Bluetooth feature on your that converts your smartphone into a
smartphone. modem so that you can access the Internet
from your computer.

USING YOUR DEVICE AS A WIRELESS MODEM 127


7
CHAPTER YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES

You can set up DUN in one of two ways: For detailed information on setting up a
USB DUN connection, go to
• You can use Modem Link (USB).
www.palm.com/us/support/DUN/.
• If your computer is enabled with
Bluetooth wireless technology, you can Creating a DUN connection using
set up your device as a wireless modem Bluetooth technology
using the built-in Bluetooth technology.
To configure DUN using Bluetooth
technology, complete the following
Setting up Modem Link for a USB
procedures:
connection
1 Press Start and select Programs. • Create a partnership between your
device and your computer as described
in Requesting a connection with
another Bluetooth device.
• Setting up your computer for a
Bluetooth DUN connection
• Accessing the Internet using a
Bluetooth DUN connection

Setting up your computer for a Bluetooth


DUN connection
2 Select Modem Link . Dial-up networking must be enabled or
installed on your computer. Follow the
3 Select the Connection list, and then
instructions from the manufacturer of your
select USB.
Bluetooth adapter to enable DUN. Your
4 Press Activate (left action key) wireless service provider may provide
and follow the wizard to set up Modem customized software programs that walk
Link. you through the DUN setup process. Check

128 USING YOUR DEVICE AS A WIRELESS MODEM


YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES 7

CHAPTER
with your wireless service provider to see 1 Open the Bluetooth screen on your
if such a program is available. computer and look for the option for
paired devices. Check your computer’s
Accessing the Internet using a Bluetooth documentation for how to open this
DUN connection screen and for the name of the paired
The steps for accessing the Internet on devices option.
your computer may vary depending on your 2 Double-click the icon or option
operating system and how Bluetooth representing your smartphone. Your
wireless technology is set up on your computer connects to your smartphone
computer—for example, if it is built in and shows that DUN services are
versus if you are using a wireless available.
Bluetooth adapter. If the following 3 Double-click the DUN icon.
procedure does not work with your
4 Enter the following in the Dial field:
computer, check your computer’s
*99# or *99***1#. Enter the username
documentation for how to set up Bluetooth
and password if one is required by your
technology to access the Internet using a
wireless service provider to make a
DUN connection.
Bluetooth DUN connection.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN
NOTE For most wireless service
• You may need to use a virtual private providers, you do not need to enter
network (VPN) to access corporate anything in the User Name or Password
email (see Connecting to a VPN (virtual field.
private network)). Check with your
system administrator for more 5 Click Dial. After the connection is
information. successfully established, you can
• Check with your wireless service browse the Internet on your computer
provider to see if you need to enter a or download your email.
username and password to make a
Bluetooth DUN connection.

USING YOUR DEVICE AS A WIRELESS MODEM 129


7
CHAPTER YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES

6 You may be asked if you want to screen. To check the status of the
remember this dial text for this connection, right-click the Bluetooth
connection. We recommend that you network icon.
choose to remember the dial text to
avoid errors and the inconvenience of Terminating a DUN Internet session
entering it for every session. To terminate the DUN connection,
7 To verify that you are connected, look right-click the icon or option representing
for a network connection icon in the your smartphone on your computer, and
taskbar at the bottom of your computer then click Disconnect.

130 USING YOUR DEVICE AS A WIRELESS MODEM


CHAP TE R

8
Your photos, videos, and
music
Do you have a wallet bulging with photos of friends, family,
pets, and your most recent vacation?
Are you tired of carrying both your MP3 player and your phone?
Your Palm® Treo™ 750 smartphone solves both problems. You
can keep your favorite photos right on your smartphone—
videos, too. And there's no need to carry an expensive MP3
player, because you can play music on your smartphone.
Simply transfer songs onto your smartphone or an expansion
card (sold separately) and then listen through your stereo
headphones.
Benefits
• Never be far from your favorite • Avoid having to use a separate
people, places, and songs photo viewer, MP3, CD, or
• Arrange your photos, videos, and mini-disc player
songs
In this chapter
Camera. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Pictures & Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Windows Media Player Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC 8

CHAPTER
Camera Camera settings). For information on
accessing your pictures on your computer,
see Viewing pictures and videos on your
Your smartphone comes with an computer.
easy-to-use, built-in, 1.3-megapixel camera
with 2x digital zoom. You can use the DID YOU KNOW? Pictures are captured and
camera to take and view pictures and stored in 16-bit color, JPG format. Resolution
videos and send them to your friends and settings range from a low end of QQVGA (120
x 160 pixels) to a high end of 1.3-megapixels
family. To add a personal touch to your
(1280 x 1024 pixels). You can change the
smartphone, use your pictures as your
default setting. See Customizing your Camera
Today screen background and as caller ID settings for details.
images, or use your videos to create video
ringtones.
1 Press Start and select Pictures &
You can receive and view pictures and Videos.
videos, and send pictures and videos as 2 Select Camera .
attachments or multimedia messages (see
Pictures & Videos). Or add a picture to a
contact (see Adding a contact). You can
also move pictures and videos to a
computer by synchronizing your
smartphone with your computer.

Taking a picture
By default, pictures are stored in the My
Pictures folder on your smartphone. If you
want to store your pictures on an
expansion card, you can change where
pictures are stored (see Customizing your

CAMERA 133
8
CHAPTER YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC

7 Hold your smartphone still until the


TIP If you see a camcorder icon below the picture renders, and then do one of the
preview image, video mode is on. To turn on
following:
the still camera, press Menu and select Still
Mode. • Press Camera (left action key)
to take another picture.
3 Adjust the position of your smartphone • Press OK to return to Thumbnail
until you see the subject you want to View.
photograph on the screen. Your
smartphone has a self-portrait mirror DID YOU KNOW? After three minutes of
next to the camera lens on the back of inactivity when previewing an image, the
camera goes into standby mode. Press any
your smartphone. Use the mirror when
key or tap the screen to return to the image
you’re taking a picture and you want to
preview. If the camera goes to standby while
be in the picture. the recording is paused, the recording is
4 (Optional) Adjust any of the following: stopped and the video clip is saved.
Zoom: Press Up to zoom in or
Down to zoom out. Taking pictures in burst mode
Resolution: Press Menu (right Burst mode takes five pictures in quick
action key) and select Resolution to succession, with one button press.
change the image quality. 1 Press Start and select Pictures &
5 (Optional) Set a five-second timer: Press Videos.
Menu (right action key), select 2 Press Camera (left action key).
Mode, and then select Timer. 3 Press Menu (right action key)
6 Press Center to capture the picture and select Mode > Burst.
or start the timer. 4 Press Center .

134 CAMERA
YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC 8

CHAPTER
Recording a video 5 (Optional) Adjust any of the following:
Videos can be any length, provided you Resolution: Press Menu and
have enough storage space available. By select Quality to change the video
default, videos are stored in the My resolution.
Pictures folder on your smartphone. If you
want to store your videos on an expansion
card, see Customizing your Camera
settings to change where videos are
stored. For information on accessing your
videos on your computer, see Viewing
pictures and videos on your computer.
1 Press Start and select Pictures &
Videos.
2 Select Camera .
3 Press Menu (right action key) 6 Press Center to start recording.
and select Video Mode. 7 When you’re finished recording, press
4 Adjust the position of your smartphone Stop (left action key) or Center
until you see the subject you want to to stop recording.
record on the screen. Your smartphone 8 (Optional) To review the video in
has a self-portrait mirror next to the Windows Media Player Mobile, press
camera lens on the back of your Thumbnails (left action key),
smartphone. Use the mirror when highlight the video, and then press
you’re recording a video and you want Center . Press OK to return to
to be in the video. Thumbnail View.

TIPIf you don’t like a video you recorded,


delete it. See Deleting a picture or video for
details.

CAMERA 135
8
CHAPTER YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC

Customizing your Camera settings 4 Select the Slide Show tab and set any
1 Press Start and select Pictures & of the following options:
Videos.
2 Press Menu (right action key)
and select Options.
3 On the General tab, set any of the
following options:

During slide shows, optimize for


viewing: Sets whether pictures are
optimized for portrait or landscape
format during slide shows.
Play screensaver when connected to
Use this picture size: Sets the size of my PC and idle for 2 minutes: Sets
pictures you send with the Messaging whether the pictures in your My
application. Pictures folder are used as a
screensaver when your smartphone is
When rotating a picture, rotate 90 connected to your computer and
degrees: Sets the direction in which ActiveSync desktop software is not
®

pictures rotate. running.

136 CAMERA
YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC 8

CHAPTER
5 Select the Camera tab and set any of 6 Select the Video tab and set any of the
the following options: following options:

Save files to: Specifies whether Include audio when recording video
pictures and videos are stored on your files: Turns the microphone on and off
smartphone or on an expansion card. so that you can record videos with or
without sound.
Type filename prefix: Assigns a name
to a series of pictures to be captured, Time limit for videos: Limits the length
such as Seattle001, Seattle002, and so of videos you record. You can select the
on. No limit option.
Still image compression level:
Sets the default size for newly captured DID YOU KNOW? Videos are captured and
stored in 3GP format. Video resolution ranges
still pictures.
from 176 x 144 pixels to 352 x 288 pixels. You
can change the resolution setting by pressing
Menu (right action key) and selecting Quality.

7 Press OK to return to the


Thumbnail View.

CAMERA 137
8
CHAPTER YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC

Pictures & Videos websites. Your smartphone supports and


streams the following types of video files:
• MPEG-4
Viewing a picture
• 3GPP2
In addition to viewing the pictures you
• 3GPP
capture with the built-in camera, you can
view pictures captured on many popular • WMV, WMA, ASF
digital cameras or downloaded from the • RTSP Streaming
Internet. Your smartphone supports the • SDP Streaming
following picture formats:
1 Press Start and select Pictures &
• JPG Videos.
• PNG 2 Select the video you want to view. For
• BMP more info on viewing videos, see
Playing media files on your smartphone.
• GIF
3 Press OK to return to Thumbnail
1 Press Start and select Pictures & View.
Videos.
TIP To view pictures or videos in a different
2 Select the picture you want to view. folder, select the Show list in the upper-left,
3 Press OK to return to Thumbnail and then select the album you want to view.
View.
Viewing a slide show
Viewing a video
1 Press Start and select Pictures &
In addition to viewing the videos you Videos.
capture with the built-in camera, you can
2 Press Menu (right action key)
view videos captured on many popular
and select Play Slide Show. The slide
digital cameras or streamed from
show plays automatically.

138 PICTURES & VIDEOS


YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC 8

CHAPTER
3 Press Center to display the slide email message or Creating and sending
show toolbar, which you can use to a multimedia message).
Rotate , Play , Pause , Reverse
, Forward , and Stop the slide Creating a video ringtone
show. You can save a video that you record as a
ringtone.
Sending a picture or video
1 Press Start and select Pictures &
You can send a picture or video to other
Videos.
picture-enabled mobile smartphone
devices or to an email address as an 2 Highlight the video you want to use as a
attachment. ringtone.
3 Press Menu (right action key)
You cannot send copyrighted pictures or
and select Save to Contact Ring Tone.
videos that appear with a lock icon in
Thumbnail View. 4 Select the contact to whom you want to
assign the ringtone.
1 Press Start and select Pictures &
Videos. Organizing pictures and videos
2 Highlight the picture or video you want You can move or copy pictures and videos
to send. to other folders or between your
3 Press Menu (right action key) smartphone and an expansion card.
and select Send.
1 Press Start and select Pictures &
4 Select the email or MMS account you Videos.
want to use to send the picture or
2 Highlight the picture or video you want
video.
to move or copy.
5 When the Inbox or Messaging
3 Do one of the following:
application opens, address and send the
message (see Creating and sending an • To move the picture or video to
another location, press Menu

PICTURES & VIDEOS 139


8
CHAPTER YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC

(right action key) and select Edit > 2 Highlight the picture you want to use.
Cut. 3 Press Menu (right action key)
• To keep the picture or video in two and select Set as Today Background.
locations, press Menu (right 4 Select the Transparency level list and
action key) and select Edit > Copy. select the appropriate level. Use a
4 Select the Show list in the upper-left, higher percentage for a more
and select the location where you want transparent picture and a lower
to place the picture or video. percentage for a more opaque picture.
5 Press Menu (right action key) 5 Press OK to return to Thumbnail
and select Edit > Paste. View.
You can also view a specific folder or
expansion card and arrange the pictures Editing a picture
and videos by name, date, or size. For more extensive edits, just download
your picture or video to your computer and
1 Press Start and select Pictures &
edit it in your favorite graphics program.
Videos.
Then sync the picture or video back to your
2 Select the Show list in the upper-left, smartphone.
and then select the folder you want to
view. 1 Press Start and select Pictures &
Videos.
3 Select the Sort By list in the upper-right,
and then select the sort method: 2 Highlight the picture you want to edit.
Name, Date, or Size. 3 Press Menu (right action key)
and select Edit.
Using a picture as the Today screen 4 Do any of the following:
background
• To rotate a picture 90 degrees, select
1 Press Start and select Pictures & Rotate.
Videos.

140 PICTURES & VIDEOS


YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC 8

CHAPTER
• To crop a picture, press Menu Viewing pictures and videos on your
(right action key) and select Crop. Tap computer
and drag the stylus to highlight the BEFORE YOU BEGIN You must install
area to crop. Tap outside the box to ActiveSync® desktop software from the
stop cropping. Windows Getting Started Disc (see
• To adjust the brightness and contrast Installing the desktop synchronization
levels of a picture, press Menu software) and select the option to
(right action key) and select synchronize media (see Changing which
AutoCorrect. applications sync).
• To undo an edit, press Menu and
select Undo. When you synchronize your smartphone,
your pictures and videos are copied to your
• To cancel all unsaved edits you made
desktop computer. You can view the
to the picture, select Revert to
pictures and videos, and you can also send
Saved.
them to friends using your desktop email
application.
Deleting a picture or video
1 Press Start and select Pictures & To find all synchronized pictures and
Videos. videos, look in C:\Documents and
Settings\<Username>\My Documents\Treo
2 Highlight the picture or video you want
My Documents.
to delete.
3 Press Menu (right action key)
and select Delete.
4 Select Yes to confirm the deletion.

PICTURES & VIDEOS 141


8
CHAPTER YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC

Windows Media video thumbnail after synchronizing the


files.
Player Mobile You can listen to these music, audio, and
video files through the speaker on the back
Windows Media Player Mobile can play of your smartphone or through stereo
music, audio, and video files that are headphones.
stored on your smartphone or on an
expansion card (sold separately) in any of Transferring media files to your
the following file formats: smartphone
• WMA Use the Sync feature in the desktop
• WMV version of Windows Media Player 10 to
transfer digital music, audio, video, and
• MP3
playlist files from your computer to an
• 3GP expansion card or your smartphone. Using
• AAC Sync ensures that the files are transferred
• AAC+ correctly.
• MPEG-4
TIP For tips on using the desktop version of
Windows Media Player, go to the Help menu
DID YOU KNOW? You can also download
in Windows Media Player on your computer.
animated GIF files and view them in Internet
Explorer Mobile.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Do the following:
IMPORTANT You must have QuickTime
Player version 6.5 or later installed on your • Be sure you have Windows Media
computer to play videos recorded by your Player 10 or later installed on your
smartphone. You can download the videos computer. Windows Media Player 10
from an expansion card or you can click the must be installed on your computer

142 WINDOWS MEDIA PLAYER MOBILE


YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC 8

CHAPTER
before you install ActiveSync desktop automatically. Be patient; transferring
software. Both Windows Media Player media files to an expansion card can
10 and ActiveSync desktop software are take several minutes.
installed from the Windows Mobile
Getting Started Disc that came with Playing media files on your smartphone
your smartphone (see My video and 1 Press Start and select Windows
music files won’t sync). Media.
• To sync media files with your computer, 2 Press Menu (right action key)
set the Media sync option on your and select Library.
smartphone (see Setting
3 Select the Library list in the upper-left,
synchronization options).
and then select the library you want to
1 On your computer, open Windows use. If you can’t find a media file on your
Media Player 10. expansion card, update the library (see
2 (Optional) Insert a 32MB or larger Working with libraries).
expansion card into your smartphone.
3 Connect your smartphone to your TIP To play a file that is not in a library, go to
the Library screen, press Menu, and select
computer with the USB sync cable.
Open File.
4 When the Device Setup Wizard opens
on your computer, click Automatic.
4 Select the item you want to play (such
5 Check the Customize the playlists as a song, album, or artist name).
that will be synchronized box.
5 Press Play (left action key). See
6 Select the playlists you want to sync. the next page for playback controls.
7 Click Finish to begin the transfer. The 6 Press Menu (right action key)
next time you connect your smartphone and select any of the following during
to your computer while the desktop playback:
version of Windows Media Player 10 is
running, synchronization starts

WINDOWS MEDIA PLAYER MOBILE 143


8
CHAPTER YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC

Library: Displays the Library screen so or Volume button increases the


you can select a different song to play. volume level.
Shuffle/Repeat > Shuffle: Plays the or Volume button decreases the
Now Playing playlist in random order. A volume level.
check appears next to this command
turns the sound on or off.
when it is on.
displays a video using the full
TIPTo repeat the current song, press Menu screen.
and select Repeat Song.
displays a website where you can
find music and videos to play.
Shuffle/Repeat > Repeat: Plays the
Now Playing playlist repeatedly. A check indicates the rating of the current
appears next to this command when it file. Select the star to change the rating.
is on.
DID YOU KNOW? You can play streaming files
Stop: Ends playback. from the web. To play an MMS (Microsoft
Use any of the following onscreen controls Media Streaming) file, press Menu on the
Library screen, and then select Open URL.
during playback:
Select URL and enter the website address, or
or Center plays the current file. select History and select a site you’ve visited
before. To play an RTSP or SDP streaming file,
or Center pauses the current file. use the Streaming Media application. Press
Start, select Programs, and then select
or Left skips to the beginning of the
Streaming Media. Select Connect and add
current file or to the previous file. the URL.
or Right skips to the next file. DID YOU KNOW? If you close the Windows
Media Player Mobile window, your music
sets the point from which playback continues to play in the background.
begins. Tap and drag the slider to
change the current position.

144 WINDOWS MEDIA PLAYER MOBILE


YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC 8

CHAPTER
Working with libraries
TIP To delete an item from a library, highlight
A library represents each of the storage the item and then press and hold Center on
locations available to Windows Media the 5-way to open the shortcut menu. Select
Player Mobile, so you should have two Delete from Library, and then select Yes to
libraries: My Device and My Storage Card. confirm the deletion.
Each library contains links to the media
files in that location. Windows Media Working with playlists
Player Mobile usually updates the My
A playlist is a list of media files that play in
Device library automatically, but you must
a specific order. You can use playlists to
manually update the My Storage Card
group audio files together or video files
library.
together for convenient playback. For
example, in the desktop Player, you can
TIPIf you don’t see a media file that you create a playlist of upbeat songs for when
added, manually update the library.
you exercise and a playlist of soothing
songs for a long flight. When you
1 Press Start and select Windows synchronize, your favorite playlists are
Media. automatically copied to your smartphone.
2 Press Menu (right action key) Your playlists appear in your libraries (in the
and select Library. My Playlists category).
3 Press Menu (right action key) A temporary playlist, called Now Playing,
and select Update Library. appears on the Now Playing menu. It lists
4 Wait for the files to be added, and then the currently playing file, as well as any
select Done. files that are queued up to play next. You
can add to, modify, or clear the files on the
Now Playing playlist.

WINDOWS MEDIA PLAYER MOBILE 145


8
CHAPTER YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC

1 Go to the Now Playing screen: action key), and then select Queue
• If you are on the Library screen, Up.
select the Now Playing category. • To delete a file from the playlist,
• If you are on the Playback screen, highlight the file, and then select
select Now Playing. Remove .
• To view more info about a file,
highlight the file and select
Properties .
• To remove all items from the Now
Playing playlist, press Menu
(right action key) and select Clear
Now Playing.

DID YOU KNOW? If you move files between your


smartphone and an expansion card, be sure to
update your libraries, or you won’t be able to
2 Do any of the following: see the files in their new location.
• To move a file up or down one slot,
highlight the file, and then select Customizing Windows Media Player
Move Up or Move Down . Mobile
1 If necessary, go to the Playback screen
TIP You can also move a file in the Now by pressing OK to close the current
Playing playlist by tapping and dragging it to a screen.
new position.
2 Press Menu (right action key)
and select Options.
• To add a file, highlight the file, select
3 On the Playback tab, set any of the
Add , press Menu (right
following options:

146 WINDOWS MEDIA PLAYER MOBILE


YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC 8

CHAPTER
Scale to fit window: Sets whether
videos are automatically scaled to fit the
Playback screen.
5 Select the Network tab and set the
following options:
Protocol: Enables and disables the
available protocols. You must select at
least one protocol. You can also set a
UDP Port.
Show time as: Sets whether the time Internet Connection Speed: Specifies
remaining or time elapsed appears in the speed of your network connection,
the Playback screen. and specifies whether you want the
Pause playback while using another device to detect connection speed.
program: Sets whether playback 6 Select the Library tab and set whether
continues if you switch to another you want to see the Library or Playback
application. screen when you open Windows Media
Resume playback after a phone call: Player Mobile.
Sets whether playback continues after 7 Select the Skins tab and select
you finish a phone call. Previous or Next to set the player’s
background.
4 Select the Video tab and set any of the
following options: 8 Select the Buttons tab to change any of
the available button settings:
Play video in full screen: Sets whether
videos automatically play in full screen
format.

WINDOWS MEDIA PLAYER MOBILE 147


8
CHAPTER YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC

• To restore an item’s factory setting,


highlight the item and select Reset.
• To unassign an item, highlight the
item and select None.
9 Press OK .

• To assign a button, highlight the item


you want to set, select Assign, and
then press the button you want to use
for that item.

148 WINDOWS MEDIA PLAYER MOBILE


CHAP TE R

9
Your personal information
organizer
Say good-bye to paper calendars and throw away those
scribbled to-do lists. Your Palm® Treo™ 750 smartphone is all
you need to organize your personal information and keep it with
you wherever you go.
You never lose your information, even if your battery is
completely drained. All your personal information is backed up
each time you synchronize, and your information is kept private
when you use the security features available on your
smartphone. Also, you can easily share info with others
electronically.

Benefits
• Track current, future, and past • Set reminders for appointments,
appointments birthdays, important tasks, and
• Make to-do lists that get done more
In this chapter
Contacts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER 9

CHAPTER
Contacts TIP Take some time to scroll down through all
the fields in a new contact. There are fields for
multiple addresses, phone numbers, email
Adding a contact
addresses, and much more.
1 Press Start and select Contacts. TIPBe sure to enter mobile numbers and
email addresses in the correct fields so that
Inbox and Messaging can find this info when
you address a message and Calendar can find
your contacts when you want to invite them
to meetings.

Here are some helpful tips for entering


info:
• To enter complete name or address
(work, home, or other) information,
2 Press New (left action key). tap the arrow on the right side of the
3 Use the 5-way navigator to move line and enter the information in the
between fields as you enter box that appears. When finished, tap
information. outside the box to accept the
information and close the box.
• To add a caller ID picture that displays
when that person calls, select
Picture, and then select Camera and
take a picture, or select an existing
picture from Thumbnail View.

CONTACTS 151
9
CHAPTER YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER

• To assign the entry to one or more


categories, select Categories and DID YOU KNOW? You can find a contact by
company name. Press Menu (right action key)
then check the categories under
and select View By > Company. Select a
which you want this entry to appear.
company name to see the contacts who work
• To assign a ringtone to the entry, there.
select Ring tone and select a tone. TIP To view a particular group of contacts,
4 To add a note to an entry, select the press Menu (right action key), select Filter,
Notes tab. and then select the category you want to
view.
5 After you enter all the information, press
OK .
Deleting a contact
Viewing or changing contact information 1 In the Contacts list, highlight the
1 In the Contacts list (viewed by name), contact you want to delete.
begin entering one of the following for 2 Press Menu (right action key)
the contact you want to view or edit: and select Delete Contact.
• First name 3 Select Yes to confirm the deletion.
• Last name
Customizing Contacts
• First initial and last initial separated by
a space 1 Go to the Contacts list.
• Phone number 2 Press Menu (right action key)
and select Options.
2 Select the entry you want to open.
3 Set any of the following options:
3 Press Menu (right action key)
and select Edit. Show alphabetical index: Displays the
alphabet at the top of the Contacts list.
4 Make changes to the entry as
You can use this index to find a contact.
necessary.
5 Press OK .

152 CONTACTS
YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER 9

CHAPTER
Show contact names only: Enables 1 Press Start and select Contacts.
you to fit more names on the Contacts 2 Press Menu (right action key),
list by hiding everything but the select Find Online, enter the name of
contact’s name. the contact, and then select Find.
Area code: Specifies the default area
code for new contact entries.
4 Press OK .
Calendar
Finding a contact in an online address Displaying your calendar
book 1 Press Start and select Calendar.
In addition to having contacts on your 2 Press Menu (right action key)
device, you can also access contact and select View.
information from your organization’s online
3 Select one of the following views:
address book or Global Address List (GAL).
Agenda: Shows your daily schedule in
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Do the following: list format. Upcoming appointments are
• Make sure you are accessing an bold; past appointments are dimmed.
Exchange Server 2003 upgraded to
Day: Shows your daily schedule in
Service Pack 2.
day-planner format.
• Add access to the online address book
to your smartphone. See Adding an Week: Shows your schedule for an
online address book. entire week.
• After adding the online address book, Month: Shows your schedule for a
you must synchronize with the whole month.
Exchange Server in order for the Find
A morning appointment
Online option to appear.
An afternoon appointment

CALENDAR 153
9
CHAPTER YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER

Both morning and evening 2 Press Menu (right action key)


appointments and select New Appointment.
An all-day event 3 Enter a subject (description) and a
location.
Year: Shows a calendar for a six-month
4 Select Starts and select the starting
period.
date and time.
5 Select Ends and select the ending date
TIP Don’t confuse the view name displayed
above the left action key with the current
and time.
view. The left action key displays the name of 6 Press OK .
the next view you see when you press the
key. TIP To “pencil in” an appointment, open the
appointment, select Status, and then select
4 Use the 5-way to move to another day, Tentative.
week, month, or year (based on the
current view). Adding an alarm reminder to an event
1 Create an event, and then select it.
Creating an appointment
2 Press Edit (left action key).
1 Press Start and select Calendar.
3 Select Reminder, and then select
Remind Me.
4 Enter the number of minutes, hours,
days, or weeks before the event you
would like to receive the alarm.

154 CALENDAR
YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER 9

CHAPTER
1 Press Start and select Calendar.

Type of time units

Number of time units 2 Press Menu (right action key)


and select New Appointment.
5 Press OK . 3 Enter a subject (description).
4 Select the starting and ending dates.
Creating an untimed event 5 Select All Day, and then select Yes.
An untimed event, such as a birthday, 6 Press OK .
anniversary, or vacation, does not occur at
a particular time of day. These events Scheduling a repeating appointment
appear as banners at the top of your 1 Create an appointment or untimed
calendar; they don’t occupy blocks of time. event, and then select it.
For example, “Submit Final Draft” in the
2 Press Edit (left action key).
screenshot shown here is an untimed
event. 3 Select Occurs, and then select a repeat
pattern. To create a repeat pattern,
select Edit pattern and follow the
DID YOU KNOW? An untimed event can last
onscreen instructions.
longer than a day.

CALENDAR 155
9
CHAPTER YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER

TIPTo enter a birthday or an anniversary, DID YOU KNOW? If you are using an Exchange
create an untimed event that repeats every Server 2003 with Service Pack 2, you can use
year. your corporate Global Address List to find
contact information for an attendee. Select
Attendees, press Menu (right action key), and
4 Press OK .
then select Find Online. Enter the name of
the attendee and select Find.
Sending a meeting request
You can email meeting invitations to 4 Press OK .
contacts who use Microsoft Office
The next time you synchronize, the
Outlook® or Outlook Mobile.
meeting request is sent to the attendees.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Create contact When attendees accept your meeting
entries with email addresses for the people request, the meeting is automatically
you want to invite to a meeting. You can’t added to their schedules. When you
access contact entries without email receive their response, your calendar is
addresses from your calendar. updated as well.

1 Create an event, and then select it. Marking an event as sensitive


2 Press Edit (left action key). If other people have access to your
3 Select Attendees, and then select the Microsoft Office Outlook calendar on your
name of the contact you want to invite. computer and you don’t want them to see
To invite other attendees, select Add an appointment, you can mark that
and select the names. appointment as private to hide it from other
Microsoft Office Outlook users.
1 Create an event, and then select it.
2 Press Edit (left action key).

156 CALENDAR
YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER 9

CHAPTER
3 Select Sensitivity, and then select one 4 Press OK .
of the following:
Private: Displays the event on your Organizing your schedule
smartphone and on your computer. Use categories to view various types of
Meeting attendees or recipients see events.
“Please treat this as Private” near the
1 Create an event, and then select it.
top of an open appointment. If you sync
with Exchange Server, other users who 2 Press Edit (left action key).
can access your folders can’t see your 3 Select Category, and then check the
private events; they see private events categories that apply to this event.
as unavailable time slots. To add a new category, press
New (left action key), enter the
Personal: Displays the event on your
category name, and then press OK .
smartphone and on your computer.
Meeting attendees or recipients see
“Please treat this as Personal” near the
top of an open appointment.
Confidential: Displays the event on
your smartphone and on your computer.
Meeting attendees or recipients see
“Please treat this as Confidential” near
the top of an open appointment.

TIP If you don’t see an option on the screen,


press Down on the 5-way to scroll to other 4 Press OK two more times.
options. For example, when editing an event, 5 After you assign events to categories,
you don’t see the Sensitivity option until you press Menu (right action key)
scroll toward the bottom of the entry. and select Filter.

CALENDAR 157
9
CHAPTER YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER

6 Select the type of events you want to 1st day of week: Specifies Sunday or
view. Monday as the first day of the week for
all Calendar views.
TIP Wonder why you’re not seeing all the
events in your day? Check to make sure that
Week view: Specifies whether five, six,
the filter is set to All Appointments. or seven days appear in Week View.
Show half hour slots: Specifies
Deleting an event whether time slots appear in hour or
1 Highlight the event you want to delete. half-hour increments in Day View and
Week View.
2 Press Menu (right action key)
and select Delete Appointment. Show week numbers: Specifies
3 Select Yes to confirm the deletion. whether week numbers (1–52) appear
in Week View.
Customizing Calendar 3 Select the Appointments tab and set
1 Press Menu (right action key) any of the following options:
and select Options.
2 On the General tab, set any of the
following options:

Set reminders for new items:


Specifies whether a reminder is
automatically added to new events and

158 CALENDAR
YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER 9

CHAPTER
how long before the event the reminder
appears. You can override this setting
Tasks
for individual events.
You can use Tasks to remind you of tasks
Show icons: Specifies which icons
you need to complete and to keep a record
appear next to events.
of completed tasks.
The event has a reminder.
Adding a task
The event repeats in a specified
pattern. 1 Press Start and select Programs.
2 Select Tasks .
The event has a note attached.
3 Press New (left action key).
A location has been assigned to the
event. TIPYou can also add a task by selecting the
Tasks entry bar at the top of the task list
The event is a meeting.
screen.
The event is marked private.
4 Enter a description of the task in the
TIP Not all icons appear in all Calendar views. Subject field.
5 Set any of the following:
Send meeting requests via: Specifies
the messaging method used to send
meeting requests: email, MMS, or
SMS.
4 Press OK .

TASKS 159
9
CHAPTER YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER

Priority: Specifies the priority level for Checking off a task


this task. Later you can arrange your 1 Select the task you want to check off.
tasks based on the importance of each
task.
Status: Indicates whether the task is
now completed.
Starts: Specifies when the task begins.
Due: Specifies the due date for the
task.
Occurs: Indicates if the task repeats at
regular intervals and how often it
repeats. 2 Press Edit (left action key).
3 Select Status and select Completed.
Reminder: Sets an alarm for this task
and indicates when you want to be 4 Press OK .
reminded.
TIP You can also mark a task complete by
Categories: Assigns the task to one or tapping the check box next to the task on the
more categories. Tasks list.

Sensitivity: Marks this task as Normal, DID YOU KNOW? Overdue tasks appear in red.
Personal, Private, or Confidential.
Organizing your tasks
Notes: Enables you to enter additional
text for the task. 1 In the Tasks list, press Menu
(right action key) and select Filter.
6 Press OK .
2 Select which tasks you want to view:
All Tasks, Recently Viewed,
No Categories, Active Tasks,

160 TASKS
YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER 9

CHAPTER
Completed Tasks, or a specific Show start and due dates: Displays
category, such as Business or Personal. task start and due dates in the Tasks
3 Press Menu (right action key) list.
and select Sort By. Show Tasks entry bar: Displays the
4 Select the sort method: Status, Tasks entry bar at the top of the Tasks
Priority, Subject, Start Date, or list.
Due Date.
4 Press OK .
Deleting a task
1 Highlight the task you want to delete.
2 Press Menu (right action key)
Notes
and select Delete Task.
Notes are a great way to capture thoughts,
3 Select Yes to confirm the deletion.
questions, and meeting notes on your
smartphone. You can also create a voice
Customizing Tasks
note or add a recording to an existing note.
1 Go to the Tasks list.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN To take advantage of
2 Press Menu (right action key)
all the sync features available in the Notes
and select Options.
application, install ActiveSync desktop
3 Set any of the following options: synchronization software from your
Set reminders for new items: Windows Mobile Getting Started Disc.
Automatically adds a reminder to new
tasks. The default reminder is set to Creating a note
8:00 on the morning the task is due. You 1 Press Start and select Programs.
can override this setting for individual
2 Select Notes .
tasks.
3 Press New (left action key).

NOTES 161
9
CHAPTER YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER

4 Do one of the following: 5 Tap the Record icon.

Voice
note
controls

• Type the text with the keyboard. 6 Speak into the microphone on your
• Write the text with the stylus. smartphone, or hold it close to another
sound source.
• Draw a sketch with the stylus,
crossing at least three ruled lines. 7 When you have finished recording, tap
the Stop icon. A Recording icon
5 Press OK .
appears in the note or note list,
depending on where you recorded the
Creating a voice note
note.
1 Press Start and select Programs.
8 Press OK .
2 Select Notes .
3 To add a voice recording to an existing DID YOU KNOW? You can add several voice
note, open the note to which you want notes within a single note.
to add the recording. TIP To play a recording, select the voice note
4 If the voice note controls are not visible in the Notes list or open the note containing
at the bottom of the screen, press the recording and tap the Recording icon. Tap
the controls at the bottom of the screen to
Menu (right action key) and
control playback and volume.
select View Recording Toolbar.

162 NOTES
YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER 9

CHAPTER
Creating a note from a template 3 Select Name, and then enter a new
1 Go to the Notes list. name for the note.
2 Select the Show list in the upper-left, 4 Select Folder, and then select the folder
and then select Templates. in which you want to store the note.
3 Open the template you want to use. 5 Select Location, and then select Main
memory or Storage Card.
4 Enter the information.
6 Press OK .
5 Press OK .
6 Rename the note and move it to the TIP To create a new folder, go to the Notes list,
appropriate folder. See Organizing your select the Show list in the upper-left, and then
notes for details. select Add/Delete. Select New, enter a name
for the folder, and then press OK.
TIP To create a new template, open the note
you want to save as a template. Press Menu Deleting a note
(right action key) and select Rename/Move.
Select Name, and then enter a name for the 1 Go to the Notes list and highlight the
template. Select the Show list, select note you want to delete.
Template, and then press OK. 2 Press Menu (right action key)
and select Delete.
Organizing your notes 3 Select Yes to confirm the deletion.
You can rename your notes, move notes to
another folder, and move notes between Customizing Notes
your smartphone and an expansion 1 Go to the Notes list.
(storage) card.
2 Press Menu (right action key)
1 Go to the Notes list and highlight a note and select Options.
you want to move. 3 Set any of the following options:
2 Press Menu (right action key) Default mode: Makes the default entry
and select Rename/Move. mode either Writing or Typing. The

NOTES 163
9
CHAPTER YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER

default is Typing; if you change it to button to record a voice note while in


Writing, you can write notes directly on another application: whether the Notes
the screen using the stylus. application opens or whether you stay
in the current application.
Default template: Specifies the default
template for new notes.
TIP To use the Record button action feature,
Save to: Indicates the default location you need to assign the Side button to open
where new notes are stored. Notes. See Reassigning buttons.

Record button action: Specifies what


happens when you press the Side 4 Press OK .

164 NOTES
CHAP TE R

10

Your Microsoft Office tools


Your Palm® Treo™ 750 smartphone enables you to take your
office with you—including your Microsoft Office files. With
Microsoft Office, you can carry, create, view, and edit Microsoft
Word and Excel files directly on your smartphone. You can also
view, carry, and manage PowerPoint files on your smartphone.
You can keep updated copies of the files on both your
smartphone and your computer so that you can work on them
in the most convenient location at any time.

Benefits
• Manage Word, Excel, and • Improve productivity by taking
PowerPoint files on your important docs, spreadsheets, and
smartphone presentations with you
In this chapter
Synchronizing your Microsoft Office files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Word Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
PowerPoint Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Excel Mobile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
YOUR MICROSOFT OFFICE TOOLS 10

CHAPTER
Synchronizing your TIP If the ActiveSync icon does not appear in
the taskbar, go to Start, navigate to
Microsoft Office files Programs, and then select Microsoft
ActiveSync to open the ActiveSync window.

You can create and edit Microsoft Office


files on your computer or on your
smartphone and then synchronize the files
so that changes you make show up on both
your computer and your smartphone. To
synchronize Microsoft Office files, you
must first set Files as one of your
synchronization options; see Setting
synchronization options.

Synchronizing files
1 Connect your smartphone to your
computer with the USB cable.
3 Under Information Type, double-click
NOTE Most options of ActiveSync desktop Files to view a list of all synchronized
software are available only when your files.
smartphone is connected to your
computer. TIPIf Files doesn’t appear under Information
Type, open the Tools menu and select
2 On your computer, double-click the Options. Make sure the Files box is checked.
ActiveSync® icon in the taskbar in
the lower-right corner of your computer 4 Do any of the following:
screen to open the ActiveSync desktop • To delete a file from the file sync
software window. folder on your computer and from

SYNCHRONIZING YOUR MICROSOFT OFFICE FILES 167


10
CHAPTER YOUR MICROSOFT OFFICE TOOLS

your smartphone, highlight the file (under On this computer, synchronize


name and click Remove. the files in this folder).
• To copy a file from your computer to On your smartphone, you can find the
your smartphone, click Add, browse synchronized file by doing either of the
to and highlight the file, and then click following:
Open.
• Press Start , select Programs, and
NOTE If you receive an error while then select the application that opens
synchronizing files, make sure that all of the file: Word Mobile , Excel Mobile
the files you’re trying to sync are closed on , or PowerPoint Mobile .
both your computer and on your • Press Start , select Programs, and
smartphone. then select File Explorer . Select the
Show list in the upper-left corner and
Where are the changes I made to my file? select My Device > My Documents.
Don't look for the changed file in its original
location on your computer. Only the
synchronized version contains the changes,
and that version is in the ActiveSync file
Word Mobile
sync folder. To find this folder, do either of
the following: You can create and edit documents and
templates and save them as DOC, RTF,
• On your computer desktop, double-click TXT, and DOT files. You can also edit
the file sync folder icon <<ICON>>. Microsoft Office Word documents and
This is a shortcut to the file sync folder. templates that you create on your
• In ActiveSync desktop software, computer. However, keep in mind that
double-click Files. The location of the some of the information and formatting
file sync folder appears in the File may be lost when you save the document
Synchronization Settings dialog box on your smartphone.

168 WORD MOBILE


YOUR MICROSOFT OFFICE TOOLS 10

CHAPTER
Revision marks. Documents appear as
DID YOU KNOW? If you have a PDF file (.pdf), though all revisions were accepted; if the
you can view the file using Picsel PDF Viewer.
document is saved, revision marks are lost.
Press Start, select Programs, and then select
PDF Viewer. Table styles. Some or all of the
formatting is lost if the document is saved.
The following features are not supported in Underline styles. Unsupported styles
Word Mobile: are mapped to one of the four supported
• Backgrounds. styles: regular, dotted, wavy, or thick/bold/
• Bidirectional text. wide.

• Document protection. Legacy Pocket Word files. You can open


PSW files, but if you edit a file, you need to
• Metafiles.
save it in DOC, RTF, TXT, or DOT format.
• Artistic page borders. Lined page
borders are supported. The following features are not supported
• Password-protected files. Remove on your smartphone, but they remain in the
file so that when you open the file on your
password protection on your computer
computer, they appear as expected:
before opening the file on your
smartphone. Fonts and font sizes. Original fonts are
• Shapes and text boxes. listed on your smartphone and are mapped
to the closest font available.
• Smart tags.
The following features are partially Footnotes, endnotes, headers, and
supported in Word Mobile: footers.

Picture bullets. Regular bullets are Lists. Indented lists are mapped to the
supported. closest indentation level supported by
Word Mobile.

WORD MOBILE 169


10
CHAPTER YOUR MICROSOFT OFFICE TOOLS

Page breaks. Although not displayed, all 2 Select the Show list in the upper-left,
page breaks, except a break placed at the and then select Templates. If you don’t
end of a document, are retained in the see Templates in the Show list, select
document. More Folders to access this folder.
3 Open the template you want to use.
Creating a document
4 Select Name and enter a new name for
1 Press Start and select Programs. the file.
2 Select Word Mobile . 5 Select the Folder list, and then select
3 Press New (left action key). the folder where you want to save the
4 Enter the text of the document. file.
5 Press OK to save the file. When you 6 Select the Type list, and then select the
save a new document, it is format in which you want to save the
automatically named after the first file.
several words in the file. 7 Select Save.

Opening an existing document TIP To create a new template, open the


document you want to save as a template.
1 Press Start and select Programs.
Press Menu and select Rename/Move.
2 Select Word Mobile . Select Name, and then enter a name for the
3 In the document list, select the template. Select the Show list, select
document you want to open. Template, and then press OK.

TIP To zoom in or out, press View, select Finding or replacing text in a document
Zoom, and then select the zoom level. 1 Open the document containing the text
you want to find.
Creating a document from a template 2 Press Menu (right action key)
1 Go to the documents list. and select Edit > Find/Replace.

170 WORD MOBILE


YOUR MICROSOFT OFFICE TOOLS 10

CHAPTER
3 Select Find what and enter the text you 3 Press Menu (right action key)
want to find. and select Copy to copy the text, or
4 (Optional) Check the Match case box to select Cut to move the text.
find text that matches the capitalization 4 Open the document where you want to
in the text you entered step 3. insert the text and position the insertion
5 (Optional) Check the Match whole point where you want the text to
words only box to find only full words appear.
that match the text you entered in 5 Press Menu (right action key)
step 3. and select Paste.
6 Select Find to locate the first instance
of the text you entered in step 3, or Saving a copy of a document
select Replace and enter the NOTE If a document was previously saved
replacement text. on a computer, any unsupported formatting
7 Select Next to find the next instance of may be lost when you save the file.
the text, or select Replace to replace it.
To replace all instances of the text, 1 Open the document you want to copy.
select Replace All. 2 Press Menu (right action key)
8 When you see a message that the and select File > Save As.
search is done, press OK . 3 Select Name and enter a new name for
the file.
Moving or copying text
4 Select the Folder list, and then select
1 Open the document containing the text the folder where you want to save the
you want to move or copy. file.
2 Highlight the text you want to move or 5 Select the Type list, and then select the
copy. format in which you want to save the
file.

WORD MOBILE 171


10
CHAPTER YOUR MICROSOFT OFFICE TOOLS

6 Select the Location list, and then select Highlight: Indicates whether the text
whether you want to store the file on appears with a yellow highlight.
your smartphone or on an expansion
Strikethrough: Indicates whether the
card.
text appears with a line through it.
7 Select Save.
5 Press OK to return to the document.
Formatting text
Formatting paragraphs and lists
1 Open the document you want to
format. 1 Open the document you want to
2 Highlight the text you want to format. format.
3 Press Menu (right action key) 2 Position the insertion point in the
and select Format > Font. paragraph you want to format.
4 Set any of the following options for the 3 Press Menu (right action key)
highlighted text: and select Format > Paragraph.
Font: Specifies the typeface. 4 Set any of the following options:
Alignment: Aligns the text paragraph
Font color: Specifies the color.
with the left, right, or center of
Size: Specifies the point size. the page.
Bold: Indicates whether the text List: Creates a bulleted or numbered
appears normal or thick. list.
Italics: Indicates whether the text Indentation: Changes the paragraph
appears upright or slanted. margins.
Underline: Indicates whether the text • Left: Sets the left margin for the
appears with an underscore. entire paragraph.
• Right: Sets the right margin for the
entire paragraph.

172 WORD MOBILE


YOUR MICROSOFT OFFICE TOOLS 10

CHAPTER
• Special: Lets you indent the first line Organizing your documents
or set a hanging indent. You can rename your documents, move
• By: Sets the size of the Special your documents to another folder, and
indentation. move your documents between your
5 Press OK to return to the document. smartphone and an expansion card.
1 Go to the documents list.
TIP You can also use the Formatting toolbar to
create a list and to align text. To indent text in
2 Highlight a file.
lists, you must use the Formatting toolbar. 3 Press Menu (right action key)
and select Rename/Move.
Checking spelling in a document 4 Select Name and enter a new name for
the document.
1 Open the document you want to check.
5 Select the Folder list, and then select
2 Press Menu (right action key) and
the folder you want to move the
select Tools > Spelling. To check the
document to.
spelling of specific text, highlight it
before you select the Spelling 6 Select the Location list, and then select
command. Main memory or Storage card.
3 If an unknown or misspelled word is 7 Press OK .
encountered, do one of the following:
TIP To create a new folder, go to the
• Select the correct word in the list if documents list, select the Show list in the
the word is spelled incorrectly. upper-left, and then select the Add/Delete
• Select Ignore if the word is spelled tab. Select New, enter a name for the folder,
correctly. and then press OK.

• Select Add to add a new word to the TIPWhen you go to a folder, you can easily
search your documents by sorting by type.
spelling dictionary.

WORD MOBILE 173


10
CHAPTER YOUR MICROSOFT OFFICE TOOLS

Deleting a document
1 Go to the documents list.
PowerPoint Mobile
2 Highlight the document you want to
With PowerPoint Mobile, you can open and
delete.
view slide show presentations created on
3 Press Menu (right action key) your computer. Many presentation
and select Delete. elements such as slide transitions,
4 Select Yes to confirm the deletion. animations, and URL links are also
supported. Microsoft Office PowerPoint ®

Customizing Word Mobile features not supported on your


1 Go to the document list. smartphone include the following:
2 Press Menu (right action key) • Notes written for slides
and select Options. • Rearrangement or editing of slides
3 Set any of the following options: • Files created in PPT format earlier than
Default template: Sets the default Microsoft PowerPoint ‘97
template for new documents. • HTML files in HTM and MHT formats
Save to: Sets the default location
where new documents are stored. TIP To copy a file from your computer to your
smartphone, open My Computer or Windows
Display in list view: Sets the types of Explorer on your computer, copy the file into
files that appear in the documents list. the Mobile Device folder, and then sync.

4 Press OK .
Playing a presentation
NOTE If a presentation is set up as a timed
slide show, the slides advance
automatically. Presentations pause during
zooming.

174 POWERPOINT MOBILE


YOUR MICROSOFT OFFICE TOOLS 10

CHAPTER
1 Press Start and select Programs. Setting presentation playback options
2 Select PowerPoint Mobile . 1 Open the presentation for which you
3 In the presentation list, highlight the want to change the settings.
presentation you want to play. 2 Press Menu (right action key)
4 Press Center . and select Show Options.
5 Do any of the following: 3 On the Orientation tab, select the
• Press Right to advance to the next orientation you want. To select the
slide or Left to view the previous orientation that best fits your
slide. smartphone screen, select Default.
• Press Menu (right action key), 4 Select the Playback tab, and check the
select Go to Slide, and select the Override playback options for all files
slide you want to view. box.
• Select Next or Previous to play 5 Set any of the following options:
animations. Show without animation: Turns off
• Press Menu (right action key), builds and other animations.
select Zoom In, and then select to Show without slide transition: Turns
zoom in or to zoom out. To scroll off transition effects between slides.
within the current slide, tap and drag
the slide. To return to the slide show, Use slide timings, if present: Enables
select . the timings recorded with each slide in
a presentation. If a presentation is set
• Press Menu (right action key)
up as a timed slide show, the slides
and select End Show.
advance automatically. Presentations
pause during zooming.

POWERPOINT MOBILE 175


10
CHAPTER YOUR MICROSOFT OFFICE TOOLS

Loop continuously: Advances to the Cell patterns: Patterns applied to cells are
first slide after playing the last slide in a removed.
presentation.
Fonts and font sizes: The original font is
6 Press OK . listed on your smartphone and mapped to
the closest font available. Original
TIP To turn the presentation into a fonts reappear on your computer.
continuously looping slide show, check both
the Use slide timings, if present, and the Number formats: Microsoft Office Excel®
Loop continuously boxes. 97 conditional formatting is displayed in
Number format.
Formulas and functions: Unsupported
Excel Mobile functions are removed, and only the
returned value of the function appears.
Formulas containing the following are also
With Excel Mobile you can create and edit
converted to values:
workbooks and templates on your
smartphone. You can also edit workbooks • An array or array argument, for example,
and templates that you create on your =SUM({1;2;3;4})
computer. However, keep in mind that you • External link references or an
may lose some of the information and intersection range reference
formatting when you save the workbook on
• References past row 16384 are
your smartphone.
replaced with #REF!
Note the following formatting Protection settings: Most protection
considerations: features are disabled but not removed.
Alignment: Vertical text appears However, password protection is removed.
horizontal. You must remove the password protection
in Microsoft Office Excel on your computer
Borders: Appear as a single line.

176 EXCEL MOBILE


YOUR MICROSOFT OFFICE TOOLS 10

CHAPTER
before opening the file on your The following features aren’t supported in
smartphone. Excel Mobile and are removed or modified
when you open a workbook on your
Zoom settings: Worksheet-specific zoom
smartphone:
settings are not retained. The zoom setting
applies to the entire workbook. • Hidden, dialog, and macro sheets
Worksheet names: Names that refer to • VBA modules
other workbooks, arrays, array formulas, or • Text boxes
intersection ranges are removed from the • Drawing objects and pictures
name list, causing those formulas to be
• Lists
resolved as “#NAME?” All hidden names
are not hidden. • Conditional formats and controls
• Pivot table data (converted to values)
AutoFilter Settings: AutoFilters that cause
rows to be hidden are supported. Use the
Creating a workbook
Unhide command to display hidden rows.
Other AutoFilters are removed, but you can 1 Press Start and select Programs.
use the AutoFilter command in Excel 2 Select Excel Mobile .
Mobile to perform similar functions. 3 Press New (left action key).
Chart Formatting: All charts are saved as 4 Highlight a cell where you want to enter
they appear in Excel Mobile. Unsupported text or other info.
chart types are changed to one of these 5 Enter the info in the cell, and then press
supported types: Column, Bar, Line, Pie, Enter .
Scatter, and Area. Background colors,
6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to enter the
gridlines, data labels, trend lines, shadows,
remaining info.
3D effects, secondary axes, and
logarithmic scales are turned off. 7 Press OK to save the file. When you
save a new workbook, it is automatically
named and placed in the workbook list.

EXCEL MOBILE 177


10
CHAPTER YOUR MICROSOFT OFFICE TOOLS

Creating a workbook from a template 1 Press Start and select Programs.


1 Go to the workbook list. 2 Select Excel Mobile .
2 Select the Show list in the upper-left, 3 In the workbook list, select the
and then select Templates. workbook you want to view.
3 Open the template you want to use. 4 Press View (left action key), and
4 Select Name and enter a new name for then select any of the following:
the workbook. Full Screen: Shows as much data as
5 Select the Folder list, and then select possible on the screen. To return to the
the folder where you want to save the normal view, select Restore in the
workbook. upper-right.
6 Select the Type list, and then select the Zoom: Sets the magnification level so
format in which you want to save the that you can easily read the worksheet.
workbook.
Sheet: Lets you switch to a different
7 Select Save. worksheet.

TIPTo create a new template, open the


DID YOU KNOW? You can also switch
workbook you want to save as a template.
worksheets by selecting the sheet list at the
Press Menu and select Rename/Move, and
bottom of the screen.
then enter a name for the template. Select
Folder, and then select Template. Press OK.
Split: Divides the window into two
Viewing a workbook scrollable areas. To move the split bar,
tap and drag it. To remove the split bar,
TIP To copy a file from your computer to your select View > Remove Split.
smartphone, open My Computer or Windows Freeze Panes: Locks rows and columns
Explorer on your computer, copy the file into
so they remain visible while you scroll.
the Mobile Device folder, and then sync.
Highlight the cell at the juncture you

178 EXCEL MOBILE


YOUR MICROSOFT OFFICE TOOLS 10

CHAPTER
want to lock before you select this
command. To unlock the rows or TIPFor simple calculations, use the Calculator
(see Calculator).
columns, select View > Unfreeze
Panes.
Entering a formula
Toolbar: Indicates whether the toolbar
appears onscreen. 1 Highlight the cell where you want to
enter the formula.
Status Bar: Indicates whether the 2 Enter equals sign ( = ) followed by any
status bar appears onscreen. values, cell references, name
Show: Indicates whether headings and references, operators, and functions.
scroll bars appear onscreen. Examples:
• =(B4/25)+100
TIP To jump to a cell or region, press Menu
and select Edit > Go To. Select Cell • =Revenue-Expenses
reference or name and enter the target cell 3 Press Enter .
info or select Current region. Select OK.
TIP To insert a symbol, place the insertion
Calculating a sum point where you want the symbol. Press
Menu and select Insert > Symbol. Highlight
1 Press View (left action key) and the symbol you want to insert, and then select
select Toolbar. Insert.
2 Highlight the cell where you want to
insert the sum. Inserting a function
3 Select . 1 Open the workbook where you want to
4 Tap and drag the stylus across the cells insert the function.
you want to add. 2 Press Menu (right action key)
5 Press Enter . and select Insert > Function.

EXCEL MOBILE 179


10
CHAPTER YOUR MICROSOFT OFFICE TOOLS

4 Select the Fill type list, and then


select Series.
5 Select the Series type list, and then
select the type of series you want. If
you select Date or Number, enter a
Step value increment.

TIP Select Autofill as the series type to


quickly fill cells with repetitive data such as
numbers or repeated text. Autofill takes the
content of the first cell in the highlighted row
3 Select the Category list, and then
or column and copies it down or across the
select the type of function you want to rest of the selection.
insert.
4 Select the Function list, and then select 6 Select OK.
the specific function you want to insert.
5 Select OK. Adding cells, rows, and columns
1 Open the workbook you want to add to.
Entering a sequence automatically
2 Highlight the area where you want to
1 Highlight both the cells containing the insert elements.
info you want to automate and the
3 Press Menu (right action key)
adjacent destination cells.
and select Insert > Cells.
2 Press Menu (right action key)
4 Select how you want to insert the
and select Edit > Fill.
elements:
3 Select the Direction list, and then
Shift cells right: Inserts a new cell. The
select the direction you want to
highlighted cell and all cells on its right
populate.
move one column to the right.

180 EXCEL MOBILE


YOUR MICROSOFT OFFICE TOOLS 10

CHAPTER
Shift cells down: Inserts a new cell. Formatting cells
The highlighted cell and all cells below it 1 Open the workbook you want to format.
move down one row.
2 Highlight the cells you want to format.
Entire row: Inserts a new row. The 3 Press Menu (right action key)
entire row in which the highlighted cell and select Format > Cells.
is located and all rows below it move
4 Select any of the following:
down one row.
Size: Sets the row height and column
Entire column: Inserts a new column. width.
The entire column in which the
highlighted cell is located and all Number: Sets the type of information
columns to its right move one column the cells contain.
to the right. Align: Sets whether text wraps within
5 Select OK. the highlighted cells, and sets horizontal
and vertical alignment position.
TIP To add a new worksheet, press Menu and Font: Sets the typeface, color, size, and
select Format > Modify Sheets. Select
style attributes.
Insert, enter a name for the worksheet, and
then press OK. To change the order of the Borders: Turns borders on and off for
worksheets, highlight a worksheet you want various cell edges, and sets the border
to move, select Move Up or Move Down, and background colors.
and then press OK to finish.
5 Press OK .

TIP To name the highlighted cell or range of


cells, press Menu and select Insert > Define
Name. Enter the name and select Add. Press
OK.

EXCEL MOBILE 181


10
CHAPTER YOUR MICROSOFT OFFICE TOOLS

Formatting rows and columns Renaming a worksheet


1 Open the workbook you want to format. 1 Open the workbook containing the
2 Highlight the rows or columns you want worksheet you want to rename.
to format. 2 Press Menu (right action key))
3 Press Menu (right action key), and select Format > Modify Sheets.
and then select Format > Row or 3 In the Sheets list, highlight the
Format > Column. worksheet you want to rename.
4 Select any of the following: 4 Select Rename, enter a new name for
AutoFit: Adjusts the size of the the worksheet, and then press OK
highlighted rows or columns to their twice.
contents.
Sorting info in a worksheet
Hide: Hides the highlighted rows or
1 Highlight the cells you want to sort.
columns.
2 Press Menu (right action key)
Unhide: Displays hidden rows or and select Tools > Sort.
columns in the highlighted area.
3 Select the Sort by list, and then select
the primary sort column.
DID YOU KNOW? You can adjust the column and
row size by tapping and dragging the right
4 Check or uncheck the Ascending box to
edge of the column or the bottom edge of the indicate if you want to sort in ascending
row. To automatically fit rows and columns to or descending order.
their contents, double-tap the lower edge of 5 (Optional) Select the Then by lists, and
the row heading or the right edge of the then select second- and third-level
column heading.
sorting options.

182 EXCEL MOBILE


YOUR MICROSOFT OFFICE TOOLS 10

CHAPTER
6 Check or uncheck the Exclude header Creating a chart
row from sort box to indicate whether 1 Open the workbook from which you
you want to sort the header row. want to create a chart.
7 Select OK. 2 Highlight the cells you want to include
in the chart.
Filtering info in a worksheet
3 Press Menu (right action key)
1 Highlight the cells that contain the info and select Insert > Chart.
you want to filter.
4 Select the type of chart, and then press
2 Press Menu (right action key) Next (right action key).
and select Tools > AutoFilter. A list
5 Confirm the area you want the chart to
appears at the top of each related
include, and then press Next
column.
(right action key).
3 Select one of the new lists, and then
6 Select the data layout, and then press
select a filter. This hides all rows that do
Next (right action key).
not include the selected filter.
7 Check the boxes to indicate whether
4 (Optional) Do any of the following:
the first row and column represent
• Select the other lists, and then select labels.
other filters.
8 Select whether you want the chart to
• To display all rows again, select the appear as a separate worksheet within
filter lists, and then select All. the current workbook, or as part of the
• To turn off filtering, press Menu and current worksheet.
select Tools > AutoFilter again. 9 Press Finish (right action key).

DID YOU KNOW? You can also create custom


filters where you specify comparisons. Select
the filter lists, and then select Custom.

EXCEL MOBILE 183


10
CHAPTER YOUR MICROSOFT OFFICE TOOLS

Formatting or changing a chart Finding or replacing info in a workbook


1 Open the workbook that contains the 1 Open the workbook containing the info
chart you want to format. you want to find.
2 Open the chart. 2 Press Menu (right action key)
3 Press Menu (right action key) and select Edit > Find/Replace.
and select Format > Chart. 3 Select Find what and enter the info you
4 Select any of the following: want to find.
Titles: Specifies the title of the chart 4 (Optional) Check the Match case box to
and headings, whether a legend find text that matches the capitalization
appears, and the placement of the in any text you entered in step 3.
legend. 5 (Optional) Check the Match whole
words only box to find only full words
Scale: Specifies the minimum and
that match any text you entered in
maximum scales for charts with x and y
step 3.
axes.
6 Select Find to locate the first instance
Type: Specifies the chart style. You can of the info you entered in step 3, or
use this setting to convert your chart to select Replace and enter the
a different format. replacement info.
Series: Lets you add, modify, format, or 7 Select Next to find the next instance of
delete related data points without the info, or select Replace to replace it.
affecting the info in your worksheet. To replace all instances of the info,
select Replace All.
5 Press OK .
8 When you see a message that Excel
Mobile is done searching, press OK .

184 EXCEL MOBILE


YOUR MICROSOFT OFFICE TOOLS 10

CHAPTER
Organizing your workbooks 3 Press Menu (right action key)
You can rename your workbooks. You can and select Edit > Delete Cells.
also move them to another folder or move 4 Select how you want to remove the
them between your smartphone and an elements:
expansion card. Shift cells left: Deletes the highlighted
1 Go to the workbook list. cells and moves all cells on their right
one column to the left.
2 Select a file.
3 Press Menu (right action key) Shift cells up: Deletes the highlighted
and select Rename/Move. cells and moves all cells below them up
one row.
4 Select Name and enter a new name for
the workbook. Entire row: Deletes the entire row in
5 Select the Folder list, and then select which the highlighted cells are located,
the folder you want to move the and moves all rows below it up one row.
workbook to. Entire column: Deletes the entire
6 Select the Location list, and then select column in which the highlighted cells
Main memory or Storage card. are located, and moves all columns on
7 Press OK . their right one column to the left.
NOTE Excel Mobile adjusts formulas to
TIPWhen you go to a folder, you can easily reflect the new cell locations. However, a
search your files by sorting by type.
formula that refers to a deleted cell
displays the #REF! error value.
Deleting cells, rows, and columns
1 Open the workbook containing the 5 Select OK.
elements you want to delete.
2 Highlight the area you want to delete.

EXCEL MOBILE 185


10
CHAPTER YOUR MICROSOFT OFFICE TOOLS

2 Press Menu (right action key)


TIP To delete a workbook, go to the workbook and select Options.
list and highlight the workbook you want to
delete. Press Menu and select Delete. Select 3 Set any of the following options:
Yes to confirm. Template for new workbook:
TIP To delete a worksheet, press Menu and Specifies the default template for new
select Format > Modify Sheets. Highlight workbooks.
the worksheet you want to delete, and then
select Delete. Select Yes, and then press OK Save new workbooks to: Specifies
to finish. where new workbooks are stored.
Files to display in list view: Specifies
Customizing Excel Mobile which types of files appear in the
1 Go to the workbook list. workbook list.
4 Press OK .

186 EXCEL MOBILE


CHAP TE R

11
Your application and info
management tools
Your Palm® Treo™ 750 smartphone comes equipped with a
variety of tools for managing and organizing your information.
Get the most out of your smartphone: Install some of the
thousands of business, education, or leisure-time applications
available. After you use your smartphone to create or capture
important business and personal information, use one of
several options to share the info with others. Insert expansion
cards (sold separately) for a compact and limitless answer to
the storage dilemma. And because there’s one on your
smartphone, you never need to carry a separate calculator.

Benefits
• Locate info in any application • Keep others up-to-date with
• Install applications, games, and meaningful business and personal
other software information
• Store, carry, and exchange info
• Always have a calculator with you
In this chapter
Finding information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Installing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Removing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Sharing information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Beaming information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Using expansion cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS 11

CHAPTER
Finding information search for words within notes,
appointments, contacts, and tasks.

Quickly find who or what you’re looking for DID YOU KNOW? Contacts on your SIM card do
by using one of these search features: not appear in the search results list.

• Lookup: Find and dial your contacts by


name or phone number. See Dialing by 1 Press Start and select Programs.
contact name for details.
• Search: Look through the text in all the
applications on your smartphone.
• File Explorer: Browse through the files
and folders on your smartphone or on
an expansion card.
• Global Address List Lookup: Look up
names in your online corporate address
list.

TIPFor information on opening and closing 2 Select Search .


apps, see Opening and closing applications.
DID YOU KNOW? You can also open Search by
Using Search pressing Option + left Shift.
Search for files and other items stored in
the My Documents folder on your 3 Select Search for, and then enter the
smartphone or on an expansion card. You file name, word, or other info you want
can search by file name or by words to find.
located in the item. For example, you can

FINDING INFORMATION 189


11
CHAPTER YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS

TIP If you’ve looked for an item before, select Show list


the Search for list, and then select the item in
the list.

4 Select the Type list, and then select the


kind of information you want to find.
5 Press Search (left action key).
6 Use the 5-way to select and view an
item from the results of the search.

Exploring files and folders


You can use File Explorer to browse the DID YOU KNOW? When the items in a folder are
contents of folders on your smartphone or displayed, you can sort them by name, date,
on an expansion card. The root folder on size, or type. Select the Sort by list in the
your smartphone is named My Device. My upper-right, and then select the sort method.
Device is similar to My Computer on your TIP The storage card symbol appears next to
computer. the names of files that are stored on an
expansion card.
1 Press Start and select Programs.
2 Select File Explorer .
4 Do any of the following:
3 Select the folder you want to explore. If
• To open an item, select it.
the folder you want is not displayed, tap
the Show list in the upper-left and • To quickly delete, rename, beam, or
select My Device to view all folders. email an item, highlight the item,
press and hold Center to open
the shortcut menu, and then select
the appropriate command.

190 FINDING INFORMATION


YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS 11

CHAPTER
• To move a file to another folder, Applications you download to your
highlight the item, press and hold computer are likely to be in a compressed
Center to open the shortcut format such as ZIP. If the file is
menu, and then select Cut or Copy. compressed, you need to use a
Open the destination folder, press and decompression utility on your computer,
hold Center to open the shortcut such as WinZip, to decompress the file
menu, and then select Paste. before you install the application on your
• To highlight multiple items, tap and smartphone.
drag the stylus. These instructions tell you how to install
IMPORTANT Do not delete any files that basic files onto your smartphone. Some
you cannot identify. These files may be software uses an installer or wizard to
required for your smartphone to function guide you through the process. For details,
properly. consult the documentation that came with
the software.

Installing applications TIPIf an application does not have a Microsoft


Mobile to Market certificate, you see a
message indicating that the application is
Your smartphone comes with several untrusted. If this occurs, you can indicate
built-in and ready-to-use applications. You whether you want to continue the installation.
can also install any of the additional
software included on the Windows Mobile Installing bonus software from the CD
Getting Started Disc as well as other The Windows Mobile Getting Started Disc
third-party applications that are compatible includes several bonus software
with Windows Mobile® 5.0 devices, such applications that you can install on your
as business software, games, and more. smartphone. You can install these
applications when you install the desktop
software, or you can install them later.

INSTALLING APPLICATIONS 191


11
CHAPTER YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS

1 Insert the Windows Mobile Getting • Make sure that the third-party
Started Disc into the CD drive on your application supports 240x240 screen
computer. resolution. Some older applications
2 Click Add Programs. have screen-size limitations.
3 Click the name of the application you • If you can try a free version of the
want to install. software before purchasing it, you can
test it first to make sure it works
4 Click Install (on the right side of the
properly.
screen).
5 (Optional) Repeat steps 3 and 4 to NOTE If you encounter a problem with a
install additional applications. third-party application (such as an error
message), contact the application’s vendor.
6 Synchronize your smartphone with your
For general troubleshooting of third-party
computer to install the application(s) on
applications, see Third-party applications.
your smartphone.

Installing third-party applications DID YOU KNOW? You can purchase a third-party
When installing third-party applications, application that lets you run Palm OS®
note the following: applications on your smartphone.
TIP Before purchasing a third-party application,
• Install only apps that use Microsoft try the free version.
Windows Mobile 5.0 for Pocket PC
Phone Edition. The Microsoft Windows
Installing applications from the Internet
Mobile 5.0 software for Smartphone is
not compatible with your smartphone. You can use Internet Explorer Mobile to
Also, programs written for earlier install Windows Mobile apps in the CAB
versions do not support 5-way file format directly from the Internet. For
navigation or action keys and can have files in any other format except CAB, you
performance problems. must first download the files to your

192 INSTALLING APPLICATIONS


YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS 11

CHAPTER
computer and then install them to your your computer (see Installing the desktop
smartphone by synchronizing. synchronization software).
1 Make sure your phone is on (see
1 Open My Computer or Windows
Turning your phone on).
Explorer on your computer.
2 Press Start and select Internet
2 Double-click Mobile Device .
Explorer.
3 Copy the application file(s) into the
3 Go to the page that contains the link to
Mobile Device folder.
the application you want to download.
4 Connect your smartphone to your
4 Press Left or Right to highlight the
computer to synchronize and install the
link to the file, and then press Center
application(s) on your smartphone.
to start the download process.
5 When the download has finished, press Installing applications onto an expansion
Start and select Programs. card
6 Select File Explorer . BEFORE YOU BEGIN To install an
7 Go to the My Documents folder in File application from your computer to an
Explorer. expansion card, you must first install
ActiveSync desktop software on
8 Tap the file you downloaded to start the
your computer (see Installing the desktop
installation program.
synchronization software).
Installing applications from your
1 Insert the expansion card into the
computer
expansion card slot (see Inserting and
BEFORE YOU BEGIN To install an removing expansion cards).
application from your computer to your
2 Connect your smartphone to your
smartphone, you must first install
computer.
ActiveSync® desktop software on

INSTALLING APPLICATIONS 193


11
CHAPTER YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS

3 Open My Computer or Windows


Explorer on your computer.
4 Double-click Mobile Device .
5 Double-click My Windows
Mobile-Based Device to open the
Mobile Device folder.
6 Copy the application file(s) into the
Storage Card folder inside the Mobile
Device folder.

3 Highlight the application that you want


Removing to remove.

applications DID YOU KNOW? Built-in applications that


cannot be deleted are not listed in the
Remove Programs list.
To free up memory on your smartphone,
you can remove applications that you no 4 Select Remove.
longer use. You can remove only
5 Select Yes to confirm the deletion.
applications, patches, and extensions that
you install; you cannot remove the built-in
applications that reside in the Read-Only
Memory (ROM) portion of your
smartphone.
Sharing information
1 Press Start and select Settings. Your smartphone comes equipped
2 Select the System tab, and then select with a variety of options for sharing
Remove Programs . information, so that you can choose the
quickest, most convenient way to send

194 REMOVING APPLICATIONS


YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS 11

CHAPTER
your info or to receive info from another
device.
Beaming information
• When you have a file open in a program
Your smartphone is equipped with an IR
such as Notes or PowerPoint Mobile,
(infrared) port that enables you to beam
you can easily share a file by selecting
information to another device with an IR
the Menu, and then selecting Send via
port. The IR port is located on the side of
E-Mail or Beam File.
your smartphone closest to the stylus, near
• In Microsoft Outlook®, you can insert a the top. You can also beam using the
picture or attach a note or other file to built-in Bluetooth wireless technology on
an email. You can also receive pictures your smartphone.
and attachments (see Your email).
The normal range for beaming with IR is
• You can synchronize to share info
about 8 inches (20 centimeters). The
between your smartphone and your
maximum range for beaming with
computer or between your smartphone
Bluetooth technology is about 30 feet
and Microsoft Exchange Server 2003
(10 meters). Performance and range are
(see Synchronizing information).
affected by physical obstacles, radio
• If you are near someone, you can beam interference from nearby electronic
files and applications between your equipment, and other factors.
smartphone and your neighbor’s device
using the IR port or Bluetooth® wireless By default, the IR port on your smartphone
technology (see Beaming information). is turned off. You need to turn IR on before
you can beam.
• You can also store files on an expansion
card and share the expansion card (see
Using expansion cards). TIP For best results, the path between the
two devices must be clear of obstacles, and
both devices kept stationary. If you have
difficulty beaming, shorten the distance and
avoid bright sunlight.

BEAMING INFORMATION 195


11
CHAPTER YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS

3 Do one of the following:


DID YOU KNOW? The type of information you
can beam depends on the type of device you
are beaming to. Other Windows Mobile
devices are always compatible with your Treo
750 smartphone.

Turning on the IR port


1 Press Start and select Settings.
2 Select the Connections tab, and then
select Beam .
3 Check the Receive all incoming
Bluetooth: When the name of the
beams box.
receiving device appears, select Tap to
send to begin the transfer. A blue icon
Beaming an entry or file
indicates a Bluetooth connection.
1 Highlight the entry or file you want to
beam. IR: Point the IR port on your smartphone
directly at the IR port of the receiving
2 Press Menu (right action key)
device. A red icon indicates an IR
and select Beam… (the menu item
connection.
changes names based on the type of
item you highlighted).

196 BEAMING INFORMATION


YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS 11

CHAPTER
4 Wait for Done to appear next to the your smartphone. For example, miniSD
name of the receiving device before you expansion cards can store the following:
continue using your smartphone. • Pictures • Games
• Videos • Applications
Receiving beamed information
• MP3 audio files • Databases
1 Turn on your screen.
• Email attachments
2 Point the IR port on your smartphone
directly at the IR port of the transmitting Expansion cards are sold separately.
device.
3 When the Receiving Data message TIPWe recommend that you purchase
appears, select Yes to receive the preformatted expansion cards. To format a
beam. card on your own, you need to connect a card
reader (sold separately) to your computer.
TIP If you can’t receive beamed info, press
Start and select Settings. Select the
Inserting and removing expansion cards
Connections tab, and then select Beam.
Make sure the Receive all incoming beams 1 Open the expansion card slot door by
box is checked. If you still can’t receive info, sliding your fingernail or another thin
try a soft reset (see Resetting your object into the notch.
smartphone).
2 Hold your smartphone with the screen
facing you and hold the card with the
label facing you. The notch on the card
Using expansion should be toward the bottom of your
smartphone.
cards 3 Insert the card into the expansion card
slot until you feel it lock into place and
The expansion card slot on your you hear the confirmation tone.
smartphone enables you to add miniSD
cards to extend the storage capacity of

USING EXPANSION CARDS 197


11
CHAPTER YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS

Notch

4 To remove an expansion card, press in 5 After you feel the expansion card slot
and release the card. eject the card, remove the card
from the slot.

198 USING EXPANSION CARDS


YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS 11

CHAPTER
Opening applications on an expansion 5 Select the application you want to open.
card
After you insert an expansion card into the Saving files to an expansion card
expansion card slot, you can open any of You can save space on your smartphone by
the applications stored on the expansion saving files to an expansion card. For
card. example, when you create new Word
Mobile documents, notes, Excel Mobile
TIPTo run an application on an expansion card, workbooks, pictures, videos, and audio
your smartphone must have enough free files, you can save them directly to an
space in the internal memory to run the expansion card. Saving files to an
application. expansion card also makes it easy to share
those files with others. (Some applications
1 Insert the expansion card into the may not support this feature.)
expansion card slot.
1 Insert an expansion card into the
2 Press Start and select Programs.
expansion card slot.
3 Select File Explorer . 2 Open the application from which you
4 Tap the Show list in the upper-left, and want to save the info.
then select Storage Card. 3 Press Menu (right action key)
Show list and select Options.
4 Select the Save to list, and then select
Storage Card.

TIPIf you don’t see the Save to list on the


Options screen, look on the other tabs (if
present). If you still can’t find a Save to list, the
application may not support this feature.

5 Press OK .

USING EXPANSION CARDS 199


11
CHAPTER YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS

Moving info between your smartphone


TIP Your applications are usually located in the
and an expansion card
My Device/Program Files folder.
1 Insert an expansion card into the
expansion card slot.
5 Press Menu (right action key)
2 Open the application from which you and select Edit > Copy or Edit > Cut.
want to move the info.
6 Go to the folder where you want to
3 Go to the list view and select the file or place the selected item.
application you want to move (see
Exploring files and folders). 7 Press Menu (right action key)
and select Edit > Paste.
4 Press Menu (right action key)
and select Rename/Move. 8 Press OK .

5 Select the Location list, and then select Viewing available expansion card
where you want to move the info: memory
Storage Card or Main Memory.
1 Insert the expansion card into the
6 Press OK . expansion card slot.
2 Press Start and select Settings.
Copying or moving applications and files
between your smartphone and an 3 Select the System tab, and then select
expansion card Memory .
1 Insert the expansion card into the 4 Select the Storage Card tab.
expansion card slot. 5 Press OK .
2 Press Start and select Programs.
Exploring files on an expansion card
3 Select File Explorer .
1 Insert the expansion card into the
4 Select the file or application you want to
expansion card slot.
copy or move (see Exploring files and
folders). 2 Press Start and select Programs.

200 USING EXPANSION CARDS


YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS 11

CHAPTER
3 Select File Explorer . 6 Press Menu (right action key)
4 Tap the Show list in the upper-left, and and select Rename.
then select Storage Card. 7 Enter a new name for the card.
5 Select the folder or files you want to 8 Press OK .
view.
6 Press OK .
Calculator
Renaming an expansion card
If you change the contents of an expansion You can use Calculator for basic arithmetic
card, you may at some point want to calculations, such as addition, subtraction,
rename the card to better match its multiplication, and division.
contents.

TIP Before copying information to or renaming


the files or folders on an expansion card, or
renaming the card itself, make sure the card is
not write-protected. See the instructions that
came with your card for details.

1 Insert the expansion card into the


expansion card slot.
2 Press Start and select Programs.
3 Select File Explorer .
Performing calculations
4 Tap the Show list in the upper-left, and
1 Press Start and select Programs.
then select My Device.
2 Select Calculator .
5 Highlight the current expansion card
name (Storage Card by default).

CALCULATOR 201
11
CHAPTER YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS

3 Enter numbers and perform Using the Calculator memory


calculations, including the following: • To store a number, select the box to the
Clears the last digit in a multi-digit left of the entry box. An M appears in
entry. the box.
Clears the current calculation or the
DID YOU KNOW? When you store a number in
displayed number. memory, it replaces the number that is
Calculates the reciprocal of a currently stored.
number.
• To add the displayed number to the
Calculates percentage.
number stored in memory, select .
Calculates the square root of a • To display the number stored in
number. memory, select .
Switches a number between • To clear the memory, select .
negative and positive.

TIP You can paste numbers into Calculator as


well as copy calculation results to be pasted
into another app. Press Menu (right action
key) and select Edit.
For more advanced calculations, use Excel
TIP
Mobile. See Excel Mobile for details.

202 CALCULATOR
CHAP TE R

12

Your personal settings


Customizing is optional. But why not personalize your Palm®
Treo™ 750 smartphone to make it match your lifestyle and work
even harder for you?
You can easily customize the sounds, fonts, screen colors, and
more on your smartphone. Take advantage of various levels of
security. Prevent making an accidental (and expensive) phone
call by locking the keyboard. Some preference settings can help
extend the life of your battery. There are lots of ways to make
your smartphone work better for you.

Benefits
• Conserve power • Make your screen easy to read
• Secure your data
In this chapter
Today screen settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
System sound settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Display and appearance settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Application settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Locking your smartphone and info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Connection settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS 12

CHAPTER
Today screen settings Selecting which items appear on your
Today screen
1 Press Start and select Settings.
Selecting your Today screen background
1 Press Start and select Settings.

2 On the Personal tab, select Today .


3 Select the Items tab.
2 On the Personal tab, select Today .
4 Check the boxes next to the items you
3 On the Appearance tab, check the Use want to appear on your Today screen,
this picture as the background box. and uncheck any items you want to
4 Select Browse. hide.
5 Select the picture you want to use. 5 (Optional) Highlight an item and select
6 Press OK . Options (if available) to configure the
settings for the item. Press OK to
TIPTo change the color theme for your return to Today Settings.
smartphone, select a new theme from the 6 Press OK .
Appearance tab in Today Settings (see
Changing the system color scheme). DID YOU KNOW? There are lots of third-party
plug-ins available for your Today screen.

TODAY SCREEN SETTINGS 205


12
CHAPTER YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS

Changing the clock format When you slide the Ringer switch back to
You can change the format of the clock on the Sound On position, it restores the
the Today screen from digital to analog and previous sound settings. For example, if
back. If you select analog format, a clock the smartphone ring volume is set to the
icon appears displaying the time. loudest setting and you slide the Ringer
switch to Sound Off, you do not hear the
1 Tap and hold the clock display with the smartphone ring. When you move the
stylus. Ringer switch back to Sound On, the
2 Select Analog or Digital. smartphone ring volume is still set to the
loudest setting.

System sound
settings
When you’re in a meeting, at the movies,
or anywhere that silence is required, you
Sound On Sound Off
can immediately silence all sounds on your
smartphone, including Calendar
notifications and system sounds. This does TIP Can't get music to play out of the built-in

not mute the speaker during phone calls. MP3 player? Check the Ringer switch. If it’s
set to Sound Off, you won’t be able to hear
music.
Silencing sounds
DID YOU KNOW? Your smartphone includes a
1 Slide the Ringer switch to Sound Off
silent alarm that can vibrate even when the
. The smartphone vibrates briefly. Ringer switch is set to Sound Off.
2 To hear all sounds again, slide the
Ringer switch to Sound On .

206 SYSTEM SOUND SETTINGS


YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS 12

CHAPTER
Selecting Sounds & Notifications Screen taps: Turns sounds associated
1 Press Start and select Settings. with tapping the screen on/off, and sets
the volume level when this sound is
2 On the Personal tab, select Sounds &
turned on.
Notifications .
3 On the Sounds tab, set any of the Hardware buttons: Turns sounds
following options: associated with pressing buttons on/off,
and sets the volume level when this
Events: Turns sounds on/off for system
sound is turned on.
warnings and error messages.

TIP To record, preview, delete, and send


sounds, select the Manage tab. To record a
sound, press Menu and select New Sound.
To play a sound, select it and press Play. To
delete a sound, highlight it and press
Backspace. To send a sound, highlight it,
press Menu, and select Send Sound.

4 Select the Notifications tab and set


any of the following options:
Programs: Turns sounds on/off in the Event: Specifies the action for which
applications on your smartphone. you want to change the settings. The
remaining options vary based on the
Notifications: Turns alarms and action you select.
reminders on/off in the applications on
your smartphone.

SYSTEM SOUND SETTINGS 207


12
CHAPTER YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS

Display and
appearance settings
Adjusting the brightness
1 Press Option , and then press .
2 Press Left and Right to adjust the
brightness.
3 Press OK .
Play sound: Lets you turn the sound
on/off for the selected event. To select a Changing the text size and clarity
different sound select the list to the
1 Press Start and select Settings.
right of this setting, and then select a
different sound. To preview the sound, 2 Select the System tab, and then select
select Play Sound, and then select Screen .
Play. 3 Select the Text Size tab.
Repeat: Indicates whether the sound 4 Press Left and Right to adjust the
plays more than once, if turned on. text size.
5 Select the Clear Type tab.
Display message on screen: Indicates
whether a notification message appears 6 To smooth the edges of screen fonts,
onscreen for the selected event. check the Enable Clear Type box.
7 Press OK .
Vibrate: Indicates whether your
smartphone vibrates to notify you about
the selected event.
5 Press OK .

208 DISPLAY AND APPEARANCE SETTINGS


YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS 12

CHAPTER
Setting display formats Currency: Sets the currency symbol
1 Press Start and select Settings. and position, the decimal symbol and
position, digit grouping symbol and
group size, and negative number
format.
Time: Sets the time style, separators,
and AM and PM symbols.
Date: Sets the short date style,
separators, and long date style.
5 Press OK .

Aligning the screen to correct tapping


2 Select the System tab, and then select problems
Regional Settings .
Occasionally, your screen may need to be
3 On the Region tab, select a region from readjusted. You know your screen needs
the list. The region selection sets the adjustment when the wrong feature is
default format settings. activated when you tap the screen. To fix
4 (Optional) Select any of the following the problem, align the screen.
tabs to customize the format settings:
1 Press Start and select Settings.
Number: Sets the decimal symbol and
number of decimal places, the digit 2 Select the System tab, and then select
grouping symbol and group size, list Screen .
separators, negative number sign 3 On the General tab, select Align
symbol and format, leading zero display, Screen.
and measurement system (metric vs. 4 Tap the screen where indicated.
U.S.). 5 Press OK .

DISPLAY AND APPEARANCE SETTINGS 209


12
CHAPTER YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS

Changing the system color scheme


Application settings
TIPYou can also set the background for your
Today screen (see Selecting your Today Arranging the Start menu
screen background).
You can change the first seven applications
listed on the Start menu. You can still
1 Press Start and select Settings. access the remaining applications by
2 On the Personal tab, select Today . selecting Programs from the Start menu,
3 On the Appearance tab, select a theme and then selecting the application’s icon.
in the list. 1 Press Start and select Settings.
4 Press OK . 2 On the Personal tab, select Menus
.
Changing screen orientation
Landscape orientations are determined by
which hand you would hold the stylus in.
1 Press Start and select Settings.
2 Select the System tab, and then select
Screen .
3 Select the General tab.
4 Select an orientation:
• Portrait
• Landscape (right-handed) 3 Check the boxes next to the
• Landscape (left-handed) applications you want to see in the Start
menu.
5 Press OK .
4 Press OK .

210 APPLICATION SETTINGS


YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS 12

CHAPTER
hardware buttons are mapped to the
TIP Don’t forget the six icons across the top of following items:
the Start menu. They’re the apps you opened
most recently, and it’s easy to get back to • Start = Start menu.
them: just use the 5-way to select one of the • OK = OK/Close.
icons.
• Option + Phone/Send =
Messaging.
Reassigning buttons
• Option + Start = Calendar.
Buttons Settings lets you select which
• Option + OK = Task Manager.
applications are associated with many of
the buttons and key combinations on your • Hold Side = Windows Media Player.
smartphone. 4 Select the Assign a program list, and
then select the application you want to
assign to the button or key combination
you selected in step 3.
5 Press OK .

Setting up voice commands


IMPORTANT The Voice Command
application is available only for English,
French, and German.

Voice commands enable you to use speech


1 Press Start and select Settings.
to execute some commands on the Start
2 On the Personal tab, select menu and the Programs screen.
Buttons .
1 Assign the Hold Side button to Voice
3 On the Program Buttons tab, highlight
Command. See Reassigning buttons for
the button or key combination you want
details.
to change in the Button list. The

APPLICATION SETTINGS 211


12
CHAPTER YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS

2 Press Start and select Settings. IMPORTANT Do not use voice commands
3 On the Personal tab, select Voice in your car until you read the End user
Command. notice about this kind of usage; see End
user notice.

1 Set the Ringer switch at the top of your


smartphone to Sound On.
2 Hold your device about nine inches
(230mm) away from your mouth, and
then press and release the assigned
Voice Command button (see Setting up
voice commands). A tone plays and a
microphone icon appears at the top of
your screen.
4 Select Enabled.
3 In a clear voice say the command. For
5 Select the items you want to enable. If
example:
an item is highlighted and the Options
button is active, select Options to • To access Help, say,“Help.” After
choose the features you want enabled Voice Command finishes speaking, a
for the highlighted item. microphone icon appears at the top of
your screen. Say your answer. For
Using voice commands example, say, “General” to access
general Help topics.
DID YOU KNOW? If you have questions about • To access your Calendar, say, “Start
the types of commands that can be used with Calendar.”
Voice Command, you can go to the on-device
Help by pressing Start and selecting Help.
• To access your music, say, “Start
Windows Media.” After Voice
Command finishes speaking, a

212 APPLICATION SETTINGS


YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS 12

CHAPTER
microphone icon appears at the top of appear as you enter text. You can also
your screen. Say your answer. specify how many letters you want to
enter before a suggestion appears, how
TIPYou can move quickly through voice many suggestions you want to see, and
commands by stopping the voice command whether a space appears after you
response before it finishes. When Voice insert a suggested word.
Command responds, you can press the Voice
Command button before it completes the
question. After the microphone icon is visible, TIP To enter a suggested word, press Down
you may say your answer. to highlight the suggestion, and then press
Center to accept it.

Setting input options


Replace text as you type: Indicates
1 Press Start and select Settings. whether the text you type adds to
2 On the Personal tab, select Input . existing text or replaces it. This is similar
3 Select the Word Completion tab and to the Insert function on a computer
set any of the following options: keyboard.
4 Select the Options tab and set any of
the following options:

Suggest words when entering text:


Indicates whether word suggestions

APPLICATION SETTINGS 213


12
CHAPTER YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS

5 Press OK .

Locking your
smartphone and info
Your smartphone includes several features
that help you protect your smartphone
from inadvertent use and keep your
Voice recording format: Specifies the information private. The built-in security
format in which you save voice notes. software lets you use your smartphone for
Default zoom level for writing: emergency calls, such as dialing your
Specifies the initial size of text entered national emergency number (such as 911
from onscreen writing methods. or 112), even if it is locked.

Default zoom level for typing: Keyguard: Manually disables all buttons
Specifies the initial size of text entered and the screen’s touch-sensitive feature
using the keyboard. to prevent accidental presses in your
briefcase or pocket.
Capitalize first letter of sentence:
Specifies whether the first letter of a Auto-Keyguard and touchscreen
sentence automatically appears in lockout: Automatically enables Keyguard
uppercase, without requiring you to after a period of inactivity and lets you
press a Shift key. disable the screen’s touch-sensitive feature
during an active call.
Scroll upon reaching the last line:
Specifies whether the display Phone Lock: Requires a PIN to make and
automatically scrolls when you select receive calls.
the last line of visible info.

214 LOCKING YOUR SMARTPHONE AND INFO


YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS 12

CHAPTER
System password lock: Requires a Turning on Auto-Keyguard
password to see any information on your Auto-Keyguard enables you configure the
smartphone. Keyguard feature.
1 Press Start and select Settings.
TIP To avoid accidentally pressing onscreen
buttons while you’re holding your smartphone 2 On the Personal tab, select
up to your ear to speak, you can disable the Keyguard .
screen’s touch-sensitive feature during active 3 Select the Auto-Keyguard list and then
calls. When the screen’s touch-sensitive
disable the Auto-Keyguard feature or set
feature is disabled, you must use the 5-way
navigator to access items on the screen.
the period of inactivity that passes
before the keyboard automatically locks.

Locking your keyboard (Keyguard)


By default, your keyboard locks so that you
don’t accidentally press buttons or activate
screen items while your smartphone is in a
pocket or bag.
• To dismiss Keyguard, press Center .
• To manually turn on Keyguard when
your smartphone screen is on, press
Option and Power/End .
4 Press OK .
TIP If you’re using a headset or hands-free
device and your smartphone is in a pocket or
Locking your screen
bag, you can manually turn on Keyguard
during a call to prevent accidental key 1 Press Start and select Settings.
presses. 2 On the Personal tab, select
Keyguard .

LOCKING YOUR SMARTPHONE AND INFO 215


12
CHAPTER YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS

3 Check or uncheck the Disable 1 Press Start and select Settings.


touchscreen box to determine whether 2 On the Personal tab, select Phone .
the screen’s touch-sensitive feature is
3 Select the Security tab.
enabled during a call.
4 Press OK .

Locking the SIM card


You can lock your SIM (Subscriber Identity
Module) card to prevent unauthorized use
of your mobile account. When your SIM
card is locked, you must enter the PIN to
power on your phone to make or receive
calls, except for emergency numbers. The
SIM card remains locked even if you move
the card to another phone. 4 Check the Require PIN when phone is
used box.
When your SIM card is locked, you can
unlock your SIM card by trying to turn on 5 Enter the PIN and press Done
the phone. A dial pad appears for you to (left action key).
enter your PIN. 6 Press OK .

BEFORE YOU BEGIN You need the 7 Turn your phone off to activate the
following: phone lock feature.

• Make sure your phone is on and that Your SIM card locks when you turn off your
you’re inside a coverage area (see phone and turn it back on. When your SIM
Turning your Palm® Treo™ 750 card is locked, you can unlock your SIM
smartphone on/off). card by entering your PIN.

• Get your default PIN from your wireless


service provider

216 LOCKING YOUR SMARTPHONE AND INFO


YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS 12

CHAPTER
between your chances to enter the
DID YOU KNOW? You can permanently unlock password. If you forget the password, you
your SIM card. Press Menu and select
need to perform a hard reset to resume
Preferences > Phone Settings. Select the
using your smartphone. Performing a hard
Security tab and uncheck the Require PIN
when phone is used box. reset deletes all the entries in your
smartphone. However, you can restore all
previously synchronized info the next time
NOTE You need your PIN number to edit
you sync (see Synchronizing information).
your PIN number or remove the locking
feature. If you enter an incorrect PIN more
1 Press Start and select Settings.
times than allowed by your wireless
service provider, the SIM card locks. After 2 On the Personal tab, select Lock .
the SIM card locks, you need the PUK (PIN 3 On the Password tab, check the
Unlock Key) to unlock the SIM card. Prompt if device unused for box to
Contact your wireless service provider for turn on the password feature.
more information and the PUK. 4 Select the first list, and then select how
long a period of inactivity must pass
Locking your smartphone before you are prompted to enter a
To protect your personal information, you password to unlock the system.
can lock the system so that you need to 5 Select the Password type list, and then
enter your password to access any of your select a format for your password.
information or use other features of
6 Select Password, tap the onscreen
your smartphone.
keyboard icon, and enter your
IMPORTANT If you lock your system, you password. Then tap the onscreen
must enter the exact password to unlock it. keyboard icon again.
If you enter an incorrect password, you are
given another chance. Each time an
incorrect password is entered, you are
given progressively longer time periods

LOCKING YOUR SMARTPHONE AND INFO 217


12
CHAPTER YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS

7 Select Confirm, tap the onscreen 1 Press Start and select Settings.
keyboard icon, and enter the 2 On the Personal tab, select Owner
password again. Then tap the onscreen Information .
keyboard icon again.
3 On the Identification tab, enter any of
8 (Optional) Select the Hint tab and enter the contact information you want to
a hint to help you recall your password. include.
9 Press OK .

TIP If you lock your smartphone and use a PIN


as the password, you can dial an emergency
number by entering the number in the
password field and pressing Send. You do not
need to press Option before entering the
number. However, if you select Strong
alphanumeric as the password type, you must
first press Option twice before entering the
number in the password field. See Locking
your smartphone.
4 Select the Notes tab and enter any
additional text you want to include.
Entering owner information
5 Select the Options tab and check the
You can enter personal information that you boxes to indicate which info (if any) you
want to associate with your smartphone, want to appear on the screen when you
such as your name, company name, and turn on your smartphone.
phone number. You can also set whether
you want this information to appear when 6 Press OK .
you turn on your smartphone. If you lose
your smartphone, this feature can help the
person who finds it return it to you.

218 LOCKING YOUR SMARTPHONE AND INFO


YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS 12

CHAPTER
TIP You can also display your Owner
Information on your Today screen. See
Selecting which items appear on your
Today screen for details.

System settings
Setting the date and time
Clock & Alarms Settings lets you set the 4 Select the first list, and then select the
time zone, time, and date for your home time zone for your home location.
location and a location that you visit. 5 Select the hour, and then press Up
or Down to increase or decrease the
To set the display format for the date and
hour setting. Repeat this process for the
time, see Setting display formats.
minute, seconds, and AM/PM settings.
1 Press Start and select Settings. 6 (Optional) Select Visiting and set the
2 Select the System tab, and then select info for a location that you visit often.
Clock & Alarms . 7 Press OK .
3 On the Time tab, select Home. 8 If prompted, select Yes to accept your
changes.

Synchronizing the date, time, and time


zone with the network
By default your smartphone synchronizes
the date, time, and time zone with your
wireless service provider’s network

SYSTEM SETTINGS 219


12
CHAPTER YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS

whenever your phone is on and you are


inside a coverage area.
1 Press Start and select Settings.
2 Select the System tab, and then select
Clock & Alarms .
3 Select the More tab.
4 To disable this option, uncheck the
Enable local network time box.
5 If you want to keep your smartphone
date and time set for your selected 4 Check a box to turn on that alarm.
location, uncheck the Use network 5 Select the description next to the box
time zone box. you checked and enter a description for
the alarm.
Setting system alarms
6 Select the days of the week you want
System alarms let you set alarms that are the alarm to go off. You can select
not associated with a task or appointment. multiple days for each alarm.
For example, you can use your smartphone
7 Select the time you want the alarm to
as an alarm clock when you travel, or set
go off, and then press OK .
alarms to remind you when it’s time to take
medication or pick up the kids. 8 Select the alarm icon, check the
boxes to select how you want the alarm
1 Press Start and select Settings. to go off, and then press OK .
2 Select the System tab, and then select
Clock & Alarms . TIP To change the alarm sound, select the
alarm sound icon, select the Play Sound list,
3 Select the Alarms tab.
and then select the alarm sound you want to
use.

220 SYSTEM SETTINGS


YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS 12

CHAPTER
9 Press OK .
TIP To delete a certificate, tap and hold the
10 If prompted, select Yes to accept your certificate in the list, and then select Delete
changes. from the shortcut menu.

Managing identity certificates


Enabling error reporting
Your smartphone may include preinstalled
Error Reporting sends info that helps
certificates. Certificates are digital
diagnose application errors for devices
documents that are used to authenticate
running Windows Mobile software. When
and exchange information on networks.
an error is detected, a text file is created.
Certificates can be issued for a user, a
You can review the file and choose
device, or a service.
whether you want it delivered to Microsoft
1 Press Start and select Settings. technical support. The information is used
2 Select the System tab, and then select by programming groups at Microsoft for
Certificates . quality control and is not used for tracking
individual users or installations for any
3 Select any of the following:
marketing purpose. The info that is
Personal: Displays certificates that collected is technical info about the state of
establish your identity when you log in your system when the error occurred. No
to a secured network, such as a documents (or any info contained in them)
corporate network. are intentionally sent with the report. To
Root: Displays certificates that identify ensure further security, the report is
the computers, such as servers, to transmitted via a secure connection and is
which you connect. These certificates kept confidential and anonymous in a
help prevent unauthorized users from limited-access database.
accessing your smartphone and
information.
4 Press OK .

SYSTEM SETTINGS 221


12
CHAPTER YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS

Storage Card: Displays the amount of


DID YOU KNOW? This error reporting method memory available on an expansion card
meets the privacy regulations of the European
that is inserted in the expansion slot on
Union (EU) as well as the Fair Information
your smartphone.
Practice Principles of the Federal Trade
Commission in the United States. To view the
Fair Information Practice Principles, visit the
Federal Trade Commission website at
www.ftc.gov/reports/privacy3/fairinfo.htm.

Your smartphone must be connected to


your computer when you send the error
report—provided your computer is
connected to the Internet.
1 Press Start and select Settings.
2 Select the System tab, and then select Running Programs: Lists the
Error Reporting . applications that are in use on your
smartphone. To switch to an application,
3 Select whether you want to enable or
highlight it and select Activate. To close
disable error reporting.
an application, highlight it and select
4 Press OK . Stop. To close all open applications,
select Stop All.
How much storage space do I have left?
1 Press and hold OK .
2 Select any of the following tabs:
Main: Displays the amount of memory
assigned to your applications and info,
as well as the amount of memory in use
versus the available memory.

222 SYSTEM SETTINGS


YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS 12

CHAPTER
TIP An easy way to check the battery level is
by tapping the Battery icon in the title bar.

4 Select the Advanced tab and set


whether your smartphone screen turns
off automatically after a specified period
of inactivity. You can assign different
intervals for battery power and external
power.

3 Press OK .

Optimizing power settings


1 Press Start and select Settings.
2 Select the System tab, and then select
Power .
3 On the Battery tab, view the power
remaining in your battery.

5 Press OK .

TIP To conserve additional battery power,


adjust the display backlight setting. Press
Start and select Settings. Select the System
tab, and then select Backlight. On the
Battery Power tab, set whether the display
backlight turns off automatically after a period
of inactivity.

SYSTEM SETTINGS 223


12
CHAPTER YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS

Turning wireless services on/off


1 From the Today screen, press Menu
Connection settings
(right action key) and select
Wireless Manager. Managing ISP settings
Your smartphone is already set up to
connect to the Internet using a high-speed
data connection on your wireless service
provider’s network. To connect to the
Internet, simply start Internet Explorer
Mobile.
For special situations, such as connecting
to your internet service provider (ISP) or to
a remote access server (RAS), you can set
up another connection.
2 Turn the wireless features on your BEFORE YOU BEGIN Obtain the following
smartphone on/off. Select All to turn all information from your ISP or system
wireless features on/off. administrator:
• ISP server phone number or access
TIP To change the settings for one of the
displayed wireless features, press Menu and point
select the wireless feature you want to • Username
change.
• Password

3 Press OK . 1 Press Start and select Settings.


You can also turn wireless services on and 2 Select the Connections tab, and then
off by tapping the signal-strength icon select Connections .
at the top of the screen, and then selecting
Wireless Manager.

224 CONNECTION SETTINGS


YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS 12

CHAPTER
3 On the Tasks tab, select Manage Ask your corporate system administrator
existing connections. for the following information:
4 Select the Modem tab. • Your username and password
5 Highlight the connection you want to • Your server’s domain name
view or change, and then select Edit, or
• Your server’s TCP/IP settings
to create a new connection, select
New. • Your server’s host name or IP address
6 Follow the onscreen instructions to edit
1 Install your third-party VPN client (see
or create the connection.
Installing applications).
Connecting to a VPN (virtual private 2 Press Start and select Settings.
network) 3 Select the Connections tab, and then
If you want to use your smartphone to select Connections .
access your corporate email account or 4 On the Tasks tab, select Add a new
other files on your corporate server, you VPN server connection.
may need to set up a VPN. A VPN enables 5 Follow the onscreen instructions to
you to log in to your corporate server enter the settings provided by your
through the company’s firewall (security corporate system administrator.
layer).
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Check with your TIP To manually start a data connection on
your wireless service provider’s network or
company’s system administrator to see if a
another network, go to Connections
VPN is required to access the corporate
Settings, and on the Tasks tab, select
network. If you need a VPN, you Manage existing connections. Tap and hold
must purchase and install a third-party VPN the connection you want to start, and then
client to use this feature. select Connect from the shortcut menu.

CONNECTION SETTINGS 225


12
CHAPTER YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS

Setting up a proxy server Ending a data connection


1 Press Start and select Settings. If your service plan includes
2 Select the Connections tab, and then minutes-of-use fees for data connections,
select Connections you can reduce costs by ending the data
connection when you’ve finished browsing
3 On the Tasks tab, select Set up my
the web.
proxy server.
4 Check both boxes near the top of the 1 Use the stylus to tap one of the data
screen. connection icons ( or ) on the title
bar.
5 Select Proxy server and enter the proxy
server name. 2 Select Disconnect from the shortcut
menu.
6 Press OK .

TIP To change settings such as the port


number, proxy server type, or credentials,
select Advanced.

226 CONNECTION SETTINGS


CHAP TE R

13

Common questions
Although we can’t anticipate all the questions you might have,
this chapter provides answers to some of the most commonly
asked questions. For additional information and answers to
other common questions, visit www.palm.com/
treo750-support.
In this chapter
Transferring info from another device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Reinstalling the desktop software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Resetting your smartphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Network connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Camera. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Third-party applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Making room on your smartphone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Voice quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
COMMON QUESTIONS 13

CHAPTER
Transferring info from Reinstalling the
another device desktop software
For information on transferring your info If you have problems synchronizing using
from a previous Windows Mobile® device ActiveSync desktop software, you may
®

or from a Palm OS device to your new


®
need to reinstall the software.
Palm® Treo™ 750 smartphone, visit
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Make sure your
www.palm.com/treo750-support for
computer profile includes administrator
instructions.
rights to install software. In large
organizations, these are usually granted
DID YOU KNOW? You can purchase a third-party
by the system administrator.
application that lets you run Palm OS®
applications on your smartphone.
1 Shut down your computer, and then
DID YOU KNOW? If you have questions about turn it on again.
Windows Mobile, you can go to the Microsoft
Windows Mobile website. Search for Palm 2 On your computer, click Start > Control
devices or Pocket PCs for information. Panel > Add or Remove Programs.
3 Remove Microsoft ActiveSync if it is on
IMPORTANT Do not use a backup utility to your computer.
transfer your info from another device to 4 Quit any active applications, including
your new smartphone. This can cause your virus scanners and Internet security
smartphone to malfunction. applications.
5 Insert the Windows Mobile Getting
Started Disc into your computer’s CD
drive and follow the onscreen
instructions.

TRANSFERRING INFO FROM ANOTHER DEVICE 229


13
CHAPTER COMMON QUESTIONS

You must install the version of 1 If your smartphone responds to key


ActiveSync desktop software that came presses, press and hold Power/End
with your smartphone on the Windows to turn off your phone.
Mobile Getting Started Disc. Other 2 If the screen display is on, press
versions may not work with this Power/End to turn off the screen.
smartphone.
3 Open the expansion card slot door on
the side of your smartphone.
DID YOU KNOW? The Windows Mobile Getting
Started Disc installs the software and drivers
4 Use the stylus tip to gently press the
that let you synchronize with Microsoft Office reset button next to the expansion card
Outlook®. If you want to synchronize with a slot.
different personal information manager (PIM),
you must install a third-party solution. Contact
the PIM’s vendor to learn if software
is available for your smartphone.

Resetting your
smartphone
Performing a soft reset
Performing a soft reset is similar to
restarting a computer. If your smartphone
is not responding or you have trouble
synchronizing with your computer, a soft
5 Wait for the progress bar on the Treo
reset may help.
logo screen to fill before continuing to
use your smartphone.

230 RESETTING YOUR SMARTPHONE


COMMON QUESTIONS 13

CHAPTER
TIP You can also do a soft reset by removing TIP Some third-party applications do not
the battery and reinserting it. create a backup on your computer when you
DID YOU KNOW? If the phone or the Bluetooth® synchronize. If you do a hard reset, you may
wireless technology feature was on before a lose info in these applications and you need to
reset, these automatically turn on after the reinstall the application on your smartphone
reset. after the hard reset. Please contact the
developer to find out if your info is backed up
during synchronization.
Performing a hard reset
DID YOU KNOW? When you synchronize after a
A hard reset erases all personal hard reset, the source folder in My
information, such as appointments, Documents changes from Treo My
contacts, and tasks, as well as programs Documents to WM_your name.
you have added, such as third-party
software on your smartphone. Never do a A hard reset can tell you whether a
hard reset without first trying a soft reset. problem stems from your smartphone or
You can restore previously synchronized from an application installed on it. If you do
information the next time you sync. not experience the problem after you
IMPORTANT Synchronize to restore your perform a hard reset, the problem may be
Outlook data, such as Outlook email, related to software you installed. See
Calendar, Contacts, Notes, and Tasks. You Third-party applications for suggestions on
can use a backup and restore solution. diagnosing third-party software issues.
Make sure it’s an application that’s 1 Synchronize your smartphone with your
approved by Palm, such as the one computer so that your smartphone
included on the Windows Mobile Getting applications and info can be restored by
Started Disc. synchronizing again after you perform
the hard rest.
2 Open the expansion card slot door on
the side of your smartphone.

RESETTING YOUR SMARTPHONE 231


13
CHAPTER COMMON QUESTIONS

3 If the screen is off, press Power/End


TIP Be sure to dispose of your old battery in an
to wake up the screen.
evironmentally responsible and legal way. In
4 While pressing and holding Power/End some areas, disposal in household or
, use the tip of the stylus to gently business trash is prohibited. Visit
press and hold the reset button next to www.palm.com/environment for more
the expansion card slot. information.
5 Continue pressing and holding both DID YOU KNOW? Your smartphone stores all
buttons until the “Erase all data?” your info even when you remove the battery.
prompt appears.
6 Press Up to confirm the hard reset. 1 Press Power/End to turn off the
screen.
7 Wait for the progress bar on the Treo
logo screen to fill before continuing to 2 Use one hand to press the Battery
use your smartphone. door release and use the other hand to
slide the battery door downward to
8 (Optional) Synchronize to restore your
remove it from your smartphone.
previously synchronized info. If you use
a backup utility, you may also need to 3 Place a finger in the notch between the
restore a backup to recover additional stylus and the battery, and lift the
info and settings. battery at a 45-degree angle.
4 Align the battery contacts with the
Replacing the battery phone contacts inside the battery
Your smartphone comes with a replaceable compartment.
battery. Be sure to use a replacement 5 Insert the battery into the compartment
battery from Palm that is compatible with at a 45-degree angle, pressing it into
Treo 750 models. Do not use a battery place. Slide the battery door onto the
from any earlier model of smartphone.

232 RESETTING YOUR SMARTPHONE


COMMON QUESTIONS 13

CHAPTER
back of the smartphone until it clicks
into place.
Performance
The applications are running slower than
usual
Battery door
1 Press Start and select Settings.
release
2 Select System, and then select
Memory .
3 Select Running Programs.
4 Select Stop All to close all your open
applications.
Battery 5 Press OK .
contacts
If the previous steps don’t fix the problem,
Phone try doing a soft reset (see Performing a soft
contacts reset). If the problem persists, follow these
steps to turn off the Voice Command
setting, if it is enabled:
Notch 1 Press Start and select Settings.
2 Select Personal, and then select Voice
Command .
6 Wait for the screen to turn on.
3 Uncheck the Enabled box.
4 Press OK .

PERFORMANCE 233
13
CHAPTER COMMON QUESTIONS

TIP Be sure that third-party applications are Screen


compatible with Windows Mobile version 5 or
later. Applications written for earlier versions
The screen appears blank
can have performance problems.
Also make sure to install only apps that use 1 If you’re on a call, when the time period
Microsoft Windows Mobile 5.0 for Pocket PC specified in Backlight Settings expires,
Phone Edition. If you can try a free version of the screen dims; one minute later, the
the software before purchasing it, you can test screen automatically turns off.
it first to make sure it works properly. Press any key except Power/End to
wake up the screen. Pressing Power/
My battery seems to drain quickly End hangs up the call.
If you have a push email solution (such as 2 Look closely at the screen. If you can
GoodLink™ wireless messaging) or if you see a dim image, try adjusting the
have set up a schedule for wireless screen brightness (see Adjusting the
synchronization, check with your email brightness).
provider or system administrator to make 3 If that doesn’t work, perform a soft
sure that the server is set up properly to reset (see Performing a soft reset).
work with your smartphone. Incorrect 4 If that doesn’t work, connect your
server setup can cause excessive drain on smartphone to the AC charger (see
your battery. Charging the battery) and perform a soft
For more tips on conversing battery life, reset again.
see Maximizing battery life). 5 If that doesn’t work, perform a hard
reset (see Performing a hard reset).

TIP If you are using a third-party application,


make sure that the application supports
240x240 screen resolution. Some older
applications have screen-size limits.

234 SCREEN
COMMON QUESTIONS 13

CHAPTER
The screen doesn’t respond accurately to 5 If you’re in a vehicle, move your
taps or activates wrong features smartphone so that it’s level
1 Make sure there is no debris trapped with a window.
under the edges of the screen.
TIP Become familiar with low coverage areas
2 Press Start and select Settings. where you live, commute, work, and play so
3 Select the System tab, and then select you know when to expect signal strength
Screen . issues.
4 On the General tab, select Align
Screen. My smartphone won’t connect to the
5 Tap the screen where indicated. mobile network

6 Press OK . 1 Try the suggestions above for weak


signals.
2 Turn off your phone and turn it on again
Network connection (see Turning your Palm® Treo™ 750
smartphone on/off).
3 Perform a soft reset (see Performing a
Signal strength is weak soft reset).
1 If you’re standing, move about 10 feet (3
meters) in any direction. My phone seems to turn off by itself
2 If you’re in a building, move near a If a system error and reset occur, the
window. Open any metal blinds. phone automatically turns on if it was on
3 If you’re in a building, move outdoors or before the reset. However, if your
to a more open area. smartphone can’t determine if your phone
was on before the reset, it does not
4 If you’re outdoors, move away from
automatically turn on the phone (see
large buildings, trees, or electrical wires.
Turning your Palm® Treo™ 750 smartphone
on/off).

NETWORK CONNECTION 235


13
CHAPTER COMMON QUESTIONS

I can’t tell if data services are available


KEY TERM UMTS (Universal Mobile
The following icons appear in the title bar Telecommunications System) A
to indicate whether data services are third-generation (3G) wireless technology that
available: is designed for high-speed data transfer, with
rates up to 384 Kbps, as well as voice and
You are in an area that supports
multimedia services.
UMTS or HSDPA services.
KEY TERM HSDPA (High-Speed Downlink
Your phone is on and a UMTS or Packet Access) An evolutionary
HSDPA data connection is active. enhancement to UMTS packet data. HSDPA
You can make and receive calls and uses different modulation and coding
transmit data simultaneously. techniques to improve downlink performance.
Your smartphone supports data rates up to
Your phone is connected to a
1.8Mbps.
UMTS or HSDPA network, but you
KEY TERM EDGE (Enhanced Data Rates for
are not actively transmitting data.
GSM Evolution) A wireless technology that
You can still make or receive calls.
can provide fast data transfer and Internet
Your phone is connected to a GPRS access with rates up to 236.8 Kbps.
(EDGE if available) network, but you
are not actively transmitting data. My smartphone won’t connect to the
You can still make or receive calls. Internet
Your phone is on and a GPRS Your smartphone supports GPRS or UMTS/
(EDGE if available) data connection HSDPA wireless data networks.
is active. You can still make or To connect to the Internet, you must
receive calls, but the data subscribe to data services with your
transmission is automatically wireless service provider.
interrupted.
• Contact your wireless service provider
to verify that your subscription plan
includes data services and that these

236 NETWORK CONNECTION


COMMON QUESTIONS 13

CHAPTER
services have been correctly activated. • Contact your wireless service provider
Your wireless service provider should to verify that your plan includes
also be able to tell you if there are any messaging services, that these services
outages in your location. have been correctly activated, and that
• Press and hold Power/End to turn they are available at your location. Your
off your phone, then press and hold the wireless service provider should be able
same button to turn it back on. to tell you if messaging services have
been experiencing transmission delays.
• Perform a soft reset (see Performing a
soft reset). • If possible, contact the recipient or
sender of the message, and make sure
• Confirm that data services are correctly
the receiving device can handle the type
configured on your smartphone by
of message you’re sending.
doing the following:
• If a text message arrives but does not
1 Press Start and select Settings. display a notification, perform a soft
2 Select the Connections tab, and then reset (see Performing a soft reset).
select Connections .
3 On the Tasks tab, select Manage I can’t make or receive calls using a
existing connections. hands-free device with Bluetooth®
wireless technology
4 If your wireless service provider’s name
appears in the list, press OK . If not, Verify all of the following:
contact your wireless service provider • The Turn on Bluetooth box is checked
for assistance. in Bluetooth Settings.
• Your Bluetooth device is charged and
I can’t send or receive text or multimedia
turned on.
messages
• Your smartphone is within range of the
• Make sure your phone is on (see
hands-free device. Bluetooth range is
Turning your Palm® Treo™ 750
up to 10 meters (30 feet) in optimum
smartphone on/off).

NETWORK CONNECTION 237


13
CHAPTER COMMON QUESTIONS

environmental conditions, which include 8 Press and hold Center to open the
the absence of the following: obstacles, shortcut menu, and then select Set as
radio interference from nearby Hands-Free.
electronic equipment, and other factors. 9 Test your headset by making or
• The Bluetooth Settings screen is closed. receiving a call.
• You are away from other devices using If the headset still doesn’t work, delete the
the 2.4 GHz radio frequency, such as existing partnership and create a new one.
cordless phones, microwaves, and To delete the partnership:
Wi-Fi equipment. If this is impossible,
1 Press Start , and then select
move the phone closer to the
Settings.
hands-free device.
2 Select the Connections tab, and then
• The device specifications are
select Bluetooth.
compatible with your smartphone.
3 Highlight the headset device name.
I lost the connection between my 4 Press and hold Center to open the
smartphone and my Bluetooth headset shortcut menu, and then select Delete.
1 Press Start , and then select 5 Create a new partnership (see
Settings. Connecting to devices with Bluetooth®
2 Select the Connections tab, and then wireless technology.
select Bluetooth.
3 Select the Devices tab.
4 Select your headset name from the list.
Synchronization
5 In Partnership Settings, make sure the
Hands Free option box is checked. Synchronization enables you to back up the
information on your smartphone onto your
6 Select Save.
computer or your server. If you ever need
7 Highlight the headset name. to perform a hard reset or otherwise erase

238 SYNCHRONIZATION
COMMON QUESTIONS 13

CHAPTER
all your information on your smartphone, direct wireless synchronization with an
you can synchronize your smartphone with Exchange Server.
your computer to restore the info. To make
sure you always have an up-to-date backup ActiveSync desktop software does not
of your info, synchronize frequently. respond to sync attempt
You can synchronize email and other As you complete the following steps,
information directly with Microsoft synchronize after each step. If the
Exchange Server 2003 with Service Pack 2 synchronization is successful, you do not
using Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync®, or need to complete the remaining steps.
you can synchronize your smartphone with 1 Verify that the USB sync cable is
your computer, using the ActiveSync securely connected at all points (see
desktop synchronization software from the Setting up your computer for
Windows Mobile Getting Started Disc that synchronization).
came with your smartphone.
2 Look for the ActiveSync icon at the
top of your smartphone screen and the
DID YOU KNOW? You can go to the Windows
ActiveSync icon in the taskbar on
Mobile website for more information at
your computer to make sure ActiveSync
www.windowsmobile.com.
desktop software is running on your
DID YOU KNOW? A common cause of sync
computer. If one or both icons if not
problems is the presence of protective
displayed, do the following:
software, such as VPNs or firewalls, on your
computer or network. Smartphone: Press Start , select
Programs, and then select ActiveSync.
ActiveSync desktop software Select Menu (right action key),
and then select Connections. Make
This section covers issues with sure the Synchronize all PCs using
synchronizing using ActiveSync desktop this connection box is checked, and
software. See Exchange ActiveSync that USB is selected from the list.
(wireless synchronization) for help with

SYNCHRONIZATION 239
13
CHAPTER COMMON QUESTIONS

Computer: Click Start, navigate to smartphone, and repeat the installation


Programs, and then select Microsoft process (see Reinstalling the desktop
ActiveSync. software).
3 Double-click the ActiveSync icon in 9 Delete the existing partnership
your taskbar. From the File menu, select between your smartphone and your
Connection Settings. Make sure the computer and create a new one by
Allow USB connections box is doing the following:
checked, and then click Connect. • Disconnect your smartphone and your
4 Perform a soft reset (see Performing a computer from the sync cable.
soft reset). • Right-click the gray ActiveSync
5 Restart your computer and make sure icon in the taskbar in the lower-right
ActiveSync desktop software is running. corner of your computer screen, and
then select Open Microsoft
6 If problems persist and you’re
ActiveSync.
synchronizing through a USB hub, try
connecting the sync cable to a different • Click File, and then click Delete
USB port or directly to your computer’s Mobile Device. When asked to
built-in USB port. confirm, click Yes.
7 If you’re already synchronizing through a • Connect your smartphone and your
built-in USB port on the front of your computer to the sync cable.
computer, move the sync cable to a • When the Synchronization Setup
USB on the back of your computer if Wizard appears, follow the steps to
your computer has USB ports in both establish a sync relationship between
places. your smartphone and your computer.
8 Uninstall the desktop software that 10 If your organization uses a firewall or a
came with your smartphone, and then VPN connection, synchronizing with
insert the Windows Mobile Getting ActiveSync may not work. Go to
Started Disc, which came with your www.microsoft.com and search for the

240 SYNCHRONIZATION
COMMON QUESTIONS 13

CHAPTER
following topics to help with specific addresses to your local Contacts list in
firewall setup situations: Microsoft Office Outlook (right-click the
• ActiveSync USB Connection addresses and select Add to Personal
Troubleshooting Guide Address Book).
• ActiveSync with Sygate Personal • Microsoft Office Outlook subfolders and
Firewall public folders are not accessible with
the included software. You may want to
• ActiveSync with TrendMicro PC-cillin
use a third-party solution instead.
Internet Security
• If you’re trying to sync offline, be sure
• ActiveSync with Norton Personal
to set your Microsoft Office Outlook
Firewall
Calendar, Contacts, Notes, and Tasks to
• ActiveSync with Zone Alarm Security be available offline.
Suite
• If you’re still having problems, try the
• ActiveSync with McAfee Personal following:
Firewall
1 Make sure you’re synchronizing with
• ActiveSync with Windows Firewall the intended desktop personal
11 Verify with your computer hardware information manager (PIM). The
vendor that your operating system Windows Mobile Getting Started Disc
supports your internal USB controller. lets you synchronize with Microsoft
Office Outlook for Windows. If you use
Synchronization finishes but info doesn’t a different PIM, you need to install
appear where it should third-party software to synchronize. For
• With the included software, your more information, consult the company
smartphone can synchronize with the that makes the PIM.
root folders of Contacts, Calendar, 2 Open ActiveSync desktop software on
Tasks, and Notes. If you want to your computer, and make sure the
synchronize with a global Exchange necessary synchronization settings are
Address Book, you must copy the set to synchronize the files.

SYNCHRONIZATION 241
13
CHAPTER COMMON QUESTIONS

3 Uninstall ActiveSync desktop software, My appointments show up in the wrong


reboot your computer, and then insert time slot after I sync
the Windows Mobile Getting Started 1 Make sure that you installed the
Disc, which came with your desktop software that came with
smartphone, and repeat the installation your smartphone. If you’re not sure
process (see Reinstalling the desktop whether this software is installed,
software). reinstall it (see Reinstalling the desktop
software).
Synchronization starts but doesn’t finish
2 Open Microsoft Office Outlook and
Make sure that you installed the desktop correct the wrong entries.
software that came with your smartphone.
3 Manually enter any information you
If you’re not sure whether this software is
added to your smartphone since the last
installed, reinstall it (see Reinstalling the
time you synchronized.
desktop software).
4 Synchronize your phone and your
My video and music files won’t sync computer.
1 Make sure you have Windows Media You should now be able to assign time
Player 10 installed on your computer. zones to your events without encountering
this problem.
2 Reinstall ActiveSync desktop software
from the Windows Mobile Getting
My scheduled sync doesn’t work
Started Disc, which came with your
smartphone (see Reinstalling the By default, a scheduled sync does not work
desktop software). Media file while you are roaming. This is to prevent
synchronization fails if you installed roaming charges on your account. If
ActiveSync desktop software before roaming charges are not a concern, follow
you installed Windows Media Player 10. these steps to continue your sync schedule
while roaming:

242 SYNCHRONIZATION
COMMON QUESTIONS 13

CHAPTER
1 Press Start and select Programs. An alert tells me that ActiveSync
2 Select ActiveSync . encountered a problem with [item type]
[item name]
3 Press Menu (right action key)
and select Schedule. An error occurred during the sync of a
single item. This error can usually be
4 Check the Use above setting when
corrected only by removing the item that
roaming box.
caused the error. If you sync again to see if
5 Press OK . the error persists, be aware that items
causing this type of error are skipped and
An alert tells me that ActiveSync do not show up again.
encountered a problem on the server
There is a temporary problem with the My Today screen settings are not restored
server or the server may be temporarily after a hard reset
overloaded. Try again later, and if the Settings such as the background image and
problem persists, contact your system plug-in choices are not backed up during
administrator. synchronization, so they can’t be restored
after a hard reset. If you use a backup
An alert tells me that there is not enough utility, you may be able to restore a backup
free memory to sync my info to recover your Today screen setting and
ActiveSync ran out of storage space. Try other additional info.
the following:
Exchange ActiveSync (wireless
1 Go to Memory Settings and close all
synchronization)
running programs (see Closing
applications). This section covers issues with direct
wireless synchronization with an Exchange
2 If the problem persists, see Making
Server. See ActiveSync desktop software
room on your smartphone for
for help with synchronizing using
suggestions on other ways to free up
ActiveSync desktop software.
space on your smartphone.

SYNCHRONIZATION 243
13
CHAPTER COMMON QUESTIONS

An alert tells me the device timed out


TIP If you are synchronizing with an Exchange while waiting for credentials
Server and you’re unable to change your lock
settings, check with your system The Exchange Server credentials screen
administrator to find out if a systemwide was left open too long. Re-enter the
locking policy is in place. Exchange Server credentials, and try to
sync again.
An alert tells me that the server could not
be reached
Your smartphone had to wait too long to Email
connect to the Exchange Server. The
connection may have been lost, the server I have problems using my account
may be temporarily overloaded, or the
Occasionally you may experience problems
server may have encountered an internal
using an email account after you set it up. If
error. Check your Exchange Server name
you followed the account setup procedure
and proxy server settings (see Setting up
and are experiencing problems in using the
wireless synchronization), and try
account, verify that the account complies
again later.
with your email provider’s requirements by
following these steps:
An alert tells me that my account
information could not be detected • Verify both your password and your
When you set up the Exchange Server username for your email account.
sync options, the credentials page was left • Some email service providers require
blank. Correct the credentials (see Setting you to be on their network to use your
up wireless synchronization), or set up your email account. If this is the case, be
smartphone to sync only with a computer, sure to use your provider’s network as
and try to sync again. the connection type for the account.
• Some email service providers have
other requirements specific to their

244 EMAIL
COMMON QUESTIONS 13

CHAPTER
service. For example, Yahoo! requires connection to your email service provider is
you to set up POP mail forwarding for disconnected, the synchronization fails.
your Yahoo! account to download email
• Check the synchronization schedule to
messages to your smartphone. Check
make sure that email sync is set to
with your service provider to see if any
occur at the expected day and time. See
provider-specific requirements exist.
Setting the synchronization schedule for
• Service provider settings frequently details.
change. If your email account was
• Press Start , select Programs, and
working but you are currently
then select ActiveSync . Press
experiencing problems, check with your
Menu (right action key) and
service provider to see if any of the
select Configure Server. Make sure the
account settings have changed.
verify password setting is on. This is
required for over-the-air synchronization.
I have problems sending and receiving
email
I have problems sending email
Short periods of time when email is
If you are able to receive email messages
unavailable are common due to server
but cannot send them, try these steps,
problems or poor wireless coverage. If you
in turn:
have problems sending or receiving mail
for an extended period of time, check with • Make sure your ISP or email provider
your ISP or email service provider to verify allows you to access email on a
that the service is working properly. smartphone. Some providers do not
offer this option at all; other providers
Scheduled email synchronization is not require an upgrade for accessing email
working on a smartphone.
If email synchronization is occurring and • Press Start , select Programs, and
you turn your smartphone off or the then select ActiveSync . Press
Menu (right action key) and

EMAIL 245
13
CHAPTER COMMON QUESTIONS

select Configure Server. Make sure the 4 Make sure that the email field is set to
SSL box is checked. the correct email client software.
• Enter the name of a different outgoing 5 Click OK.
mail server for sending mail. Many ISPs, 6 Start the email client software and
such as cable companies, require that make sure it is configured as the default
you have an Internet connection to their MAPI client. Consult the documentation
network to send email through their for your desktop email application for
servers. In this case, you can almost more information.
always receive email from these
accounts, but if you want to send email, When I sync with my Exchange Server my
you must send it through another server info is not downloading to my
(see Setting up a POP/IMAP account in smartphone
the Inbox application).
Check with your system administrator to
obtain the name of the mail server that
My vCard or vCal email attachment isn’t
offers you wireless access to the corporate
forwarding correctly
mail system. If you cannot obtain the name
Microsoft Office Outlook provides several of this server (some companies do not give
features that work with email client it out, because they do not want wireless
software on a Windows computer. For access to their servers), you cannot use
these features to work correctly, the email Exchange ActiveSync to synchronize with
client software must be properly set up. the Exchange Server. You can also check
Follow these steps to check the settings: the following setting:
1 Click Start on your computer, and then 1 Press Start and select Programs.
select Settings.
2 Select ActiveSync .
2 Select Control Panel.
3 Press Menu (right action key)
3 Select Internet Options, and then click and select Configure Server.
the Programs tab.
4 Make sure the SSL box is checked.

246 EMAIL
COMMON QUESTIONS 13

CHAPTER
Web TIP Your smartphone can open your email
application when you select an email address
on a web page. If nothing happens when you
I can’t access a web page
select the link, try setting up your email
First, make sure you have Internet access: application first.
Open Internet Explorer Mobile and try to
view a web page you’ve loaded before. To An image or map is too small on my
ensure that you’re viewing the page smartphone screen
directly from the Internet, press Menu
Internet Explorer Mobile has several
(right action key) and select Refresh.
viewing modes: One Column, Default,
After confirming your Internet connection,
Desktop, and Full Screen. Switch to
try to view the page in question again. If it
Desktop to see the full-size image (see
comes up blank, press Menu (right
Viewing a web page).
action key) and select Refresh.
If you’re still having trouble, the page may A secure site refuses to permit a
contain elements that are not supported by transaction
Internet Explorer Mobile, such as Flash, Some websites don’t support certain
Shockwave, VBScript, WML script, and browsers for transactions. Please contact
other plug-ins. the site’s webmaster to make sure the site
allows transactions using Internet Explorer
Some websites use a redirector to their Mobile.
true home page. For example, if you enter
the address http://www.palm.com/support,
it may resolve to http://www.palm.com/us/
support. If Internet Explorer Mobile can’t
follow the redirect, try using a desktop
browser to see the landing page of the
redirector, and enter that address in
Internet Explorer Mobile.

WEB 247
13
CHAPTER COMMON QUESTIONS

Camera • For best results, verify that you have the


brightest light source coming from
behind you, lighting the subject’s face.
Avoid taking indoor pictures with the
DID YOU KNOW? Pictures are 16-bit color. subject in front of a window or light.
Resolution settings range from the low end of
VGA (160 x 120 pixels) to a high end of 1.3 • Make sure the subject is at least 0.5
megapixels (1280 x 1024). Video resolution meters (18 inches) away from the
settings range from a low end of 176 x 144 camera to ensure good focus.
pixels to a high end of 352 x 288 pixels. You Remember that when you synchronize,
can change the resolution setting by pressing your Camera images are stored in the
Menu (right action key) and selecting
C:\Documents and
Resolution (still images) or Quality (video).
Settings\<Username>\My Documents\Treo
My Documents folder on your hard drive
Here are some tips for taking good pictures (see Camera).
with the built-in camera:
• Clean the camera’s lens with a soft, The Camera preview image looks strange
lint-free cloth. Some third-party applications overwrite the
• Take pictures in bright lighting color settings on your smartphone with
conditions. Low-light images may be their own 8-bit color settings. This can
grainy, due to the sensitivity of the affect the Camera Preview Mode. Delete
camera. third-party applications one by one until the
preview image improves.
• Hold the camera as still as possible. Try
supporting your picture-taking arm
against your body or a stationary object
(such as a wall).
• Keep the subject of the pictures still.
Exposure time is longer with lower light
levels, so you may see a blur.

248 CAMERA
COMMON QUESTIONS 13

CHAPTER
Third-party version 5.2 operating system on your
smartphone.
applications 3 Delete the most recently installed
application from your smartphone (see
Removing applications).
Sometimes third-party applications can
cause conflicts on your smartphone. 4 If the problem persists, perform another
Third-party applications that modify soft reset.
wireless features may affect the 5 If possible, synchronize or use a backup
performance of your smartphone and may utility to back up your most recent info.
require extra troubleshooting. Use caution 6 Perform a hard reset (see Performing a
when installing the following types of hard reset).
applications:
7 Synchronize or restore your backup to
• Ringtone managers restore the info in your built-in
• Caller ID applications applications.
• Instant messaging 8 If the problem is resolved, begin
reinstalling your third-party applications
• Applications that modify when your
one at a time.
phone or data connections turn on or off
and how your phone behaves 9 If the problem recurs, delete the last
application you installed and report the
If you recently installed an application and
problem to its developer.
your smartphone seems to be stuck, try
the following:
Getting more help
1 Perform a soft reset (see Performing a Contact the vendor of any third-party
soft reset). software if you require further assistance.
2 Make sure the third-party application is
compatible with the Windows Mobile

THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS 249


13
CHAPTER COMMON QUESTIONS

from your smartphone (see Deleting a


TIP Remember that not all third-party single message). You may also want to
applications were written with the Treo 750
empty the deleted items folder.
smartphone keyboard and 5-way navigator in
mind. You may encounter strange behavior or • Internet: If you save links to pages
errors in these applications if you use the you’ve visited in Internet Explorer
keyboard and the 5-way navigator. Mobile, you may want to clear all recent
pages (see Customizing your Internet
Explorer Mobile settings).
Making room on your • Third-party applications: You can
delete infrequently used applications or
smartphone move them to an expansion card (see
Copying or moving applications and files
If you store a large number of records, or between your smartphone and an
install many third-party applications, the expansion card).
internal memory on your smartphone may Also, remember that your smartphone
fill up. Here are some common ways to includes an expansion card slot, and that
clear space on your smartphone: you can store applications and information
on expansion cards. However, you still
• Camera: Large images or videos take need free memory on the smartphone
up a lot of memory. Move images to an itself to run applications from an expansion
expansion card or delete images from card.
your smartphone (see Pictures &
Videos).
• Messaging: Multimedia content and
email attachments can consume
excessive memory. Move multimedia
content and attachments to an
expansion card, or delete large files

250 MAKING ROOM ON YOUR SMARTPHONE


COMMON QUESTIONS 13

CHAPTER
Voice quality surface, try turning the smartphone
“face down” (screen facing the
surface).
Is the other person hearing an echo?
• Try decreasing the volume on your Are you hearing your own voice echo?
smartphone to avoid coupling Ask the other person to turn down their
or feedback on the other person’s end. volume or to hold the smartphone closer to
This applies to both the speakerphone their ear.
and to the handset earpiece.
• Position the smartphone closer to your Is your voice too quiet on the other end?
ear to prevent sound leaking back to the Be sure to hold the bottom of the
microphone. Keep your hand away from smartphone, or the hands-free
the microphone hole, which is on the microphone, close to your mouth.
lower-right side of your smartphone.
Check the signal strength indicator. If the
• If you’re using Speakerphone mode signal is weak, try to find an area with
with your smartphone lying on a flat better coverage.

VOICE QUALITY 251


13
CHAPTER COMMON QUESTIONS

252 VOICE QUALITY


Where to learn more To view the on-device guide, press
Start and select Help.
• Online support from Palm: For
For a quick introduction up-to-date downloads, troubleshooting,
• Quick Tour: The Quick Tour introduces and support information, go to
you to many of your Palm® Treo™ 750 www.palm.com/treo750-support.
smartphone’s features. It is already
installed on your smartphone, and you If you need more information
can open it any time. Press Start , • Books: Many books on Windows
select Programs, and then select Quick Mobile devices are available in local or
®

Tour . online book retailers (look in the


computers section).
While using your smartphone
• Customer service from your wireless
• On-device User Guide: A copy of this service provider: For questions about
guide is included on your smartphone. your mobile account or features, contact
The on-device guide is specially your wireless service provider’s
formatted for your smartphone screen. customer care.

WHERE TO LEARN MORE 253


254 WHERE TO LEARN MORE
Terms are unaffected by this setting. See
Optimizing power settings.
beam
ActiveSync®
The process of sending or receiving an
The technology that exchanges and
entry or application using the infrared port
updates the information on your Palm®
on your smartphone or using Bluetooth®
Treo™ 750 smartphone with the information
wireless technology. See Beaming
on your computer. To open ActiveSync on
information.
your computer, double-click the ActiveSync
icon in the taskbar in the lower-right corner Bluetooth® wireless technology
of your screen. If the icon does not appear, Technology that enables devices such as
click Start, click All Programs (or navigate smartphones, mobile phones, and
to the Programs group), and then select computers to connect wirelessly to each
Microsoft ActiveSync. See Installing the other so that they can exchange
desktop synchronization software. information over short distances. For more
Alt (alternative) info, visit www.bluetooth.com. See
Connecting to devices with Bluetooth®
The key that you use to enter accented
wireless technology.
characters and symbols that do not appear
on your keyboard. Press Alt , and then desktop software
press a key on the keyboard to view the A Personal Information Manager (PIM)
alternative characters available for that key. application for computers, such as
See Entering other symbols and accented Microsoft Outlook®, that helps you manage
characters. your personal information and keep it
auto-off interval synchronized with your smartphone. See
Installing the desktop synchronization
The time of inactivity that passes before
software.
the screen on your smartphone turns off.
The wireless features on your smartphone

TERMS 255
dialog box infrared (IR)
A set of options and command buttons that A way of transmitting information using
is enclosed by a border and that enables light waves. You use the IR port on
you to carry out a specific task. your smartphone to transfer information
between other IR devices within a
EDGE (Enhanced Data rates for GSM
short radius. See Beaming information.
Evolution)
An enhanced version of GPRS that delivers Lithium Ion (Li-Ion)
data speeds that are up to 3 times faster The rechargeable battery technology used
than standard GPRS connections, with in your smartphone. See Charging the
rates up to 236.8 Kbps. (Additional charges battery.
may apply.) See What are all those icons?
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync®
GPRS (General Packet Radio Service) Technology that allows your smartphone to
A mobile Internet connectivity technology synchronize email, contacts, calendar
that allows persistent data connections. events, and tasks wirelessly with Microsoft
(Additional charges may apply.) See What Exchange Server 2003. See Setting up
are all those icons? wireless synchronization.
HSDPA (High-Speed Download Packet MMS (Multimedia Messaging System)
Access) An enhanced messaging system that
An evolutionary enhancement to UMTS enables you to send pictures, animations,
packet data. HSDPA uses different and ringtones almost instantly. See
modulation and coding techniques to Creating and sending a multimedia
improve downlink performance. Your message.
smartphone supports data rates up to Mobile Device
1.8Mbps.
The component on your Windows
computer that enables you to install
applications and other information on your

256 TERMS
smartphone. To access it, open Windows make calls except those to emergency
Explorer or My Computer and look for the numbers. You can still use the organizer
Mobile Device entry. See Installing features, however. To turn the phone on/
applications from your computer. off, go to the Wireless Manager. See
Turning your phone on.
Option
Press this key and then a second key to Phone/Send
enter the character or to access the feature The button on your smartphone that
displayed above the letter on the second provides quick access to your Today screen
key. See Entering numbers, punctuation, and dials after you’ve entered a phone
and symbols. number. See Making calls from the Today
screen.
partnership
The connection that you make between piconet
two devices by means of Bluetooth
An ad-hoc network of devices that uses
wireless technology. The devices recognize
Bluetooth wireless technology to connect
each other because each device finds the
one master device with up to seven active
same passkey on the other device. After
slave devices. The network can include up
you create a partnership between the
to 255 inactive, or parked, slave devices
devices, you no longer need to enter the
which the master device can bring into
passkey. Partnership is also known as
active status at any time.
paired relationship, pairing, trusted device,
and trusted pair on some devices. See PIM (personal information manager)
Connecting to devices with Bluetooth® A genre of software that includes
wireless technology. applications such as Microsoft Outlook,
Phone Off Palm® Desktop software, Lotus Notes, and
ACT!. PIMs generally store contacts,
Appearing on the Today screen, this
schedules, tasks, and memos.
indicates that your smartphone is not
connected to any network, and you cannot

TERMS 257
PIN (personal identification number) SMS (Short Messaging Service)
The password assigned to your SIM card The service that exchanges short text
by your wireless service provider. Turning messages almost instantly between
on the PIN lock secures your wireless mobile devices. Your smartphone can send
account. See also PUK. See Locking the and receive text messages while you are
SIM card. on a call. See Creating and sending a text
message.
PIN2 (personal identification number 2)
A code that protects certain network Start
settings such as fixed dialing. The menu on your smartphone from which
you can open all applications. See Opening
PUK (PIN unlock key)
applications.
A special extended password assigned to
your SIM card. If you enter the wrong PIN streaming
more than the allowed number of times, Technology that enables you to access
your SIM is blocked and you must call your media content—for example, watch video
wireless service provider for the PUK. See or listen to an audio program—directly
Locking the SIM card. from the Internet on your smartphone
without needing to download a file to save
SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) card
on your smartphone. See Viewing a video.
The smartcard, inserted into your
smartphone, that contains your mobile synchronization
account information, such as your phone The process in which information that is
number and the services to which you entered or updated on your smartphone,
subscribe. Addresses and phone numbers your computer, or a server is automatically
and SMS messages can also be stored on updated in one of the other locations either
the SIM card. See Inserting the SIM card wirelessly or by means of a cable
and battery. connection. See Synchronizing information.

258 TERMS
UMTS (Universal Mobile wirelessly using Microsoft Exchange
Telecommunications System) ActiveSync, you do not need to give your
One of the third-generation (3G) mobile smartphone a username. See Installing the
phone technologies that is designed for desktop synchronization software.
high-speed data transfer, with rates up to Windows Mobile
384 Kbps, as well as voice and multimedia
The operating system of your Treo 750
services. It uses W-CDMA as the
smartphone. Your smartphone uses
underlying technology. See What are all
Windows Mobile® 5.2. When installing
those icons?
third-party applications to your
username smartphone, be sure to install only apps
The name associated with your that use Microsoft Windows Mobile 5.0 for
smartphone that distinguishes it from Pocket PC Phone Edition. The Microsoft
other Windows Mobile® devices. If you Windows Mobile 5.0 software for
install ActiveSync® desktop software, you Smartphone is not compatible with your
are asked to give your smartphone a Treo 750 smartphone. See Installing
username. If you only synchronize third-party applications.

TERMS 259
260 TERMS
Regulatory The Federal Communications Commission (FCC), Industrie Canada
(IC), and other agencies around the world have established limits that
incorporate a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety

information of all persons using this equipment.

In order to certify this unit for sale in the US, Canada and Europe this
unit has been tested for RF exposure compliance at a qualified test
laboratory and found to comply with the regulations regarding
FCC Statement
exposure to RF Energy.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits
SAR was measured with the unit transmitting at its maximum
for a Class B computer peripheral, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC
certified RF power. Often, however, during normal operation the unit
Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
will transmit much less than maximum power. Transmit power is
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This
controlled automatically and, in general is reduced as you get closer
equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy
to a cellular base station. This reduction in transmit power will result
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may
in a lower RF energy exposure and resulting SAR value.
cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there
is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
FCC RF Safety Statement
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the In order to comply with FCC RF exposure safety guidelines, users
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the MUST use one of the following types of bodyworn accessories.
interference by one or more of the following measures:
• A Palm® brand body-worn accessory that has been tested for
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. SAR compliance and is intended for use with this product.

• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. • An accessory that contains NO metal (snaps, clips, etc) and
provides AT LEAST 1.5 cm of separation between the users body
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different
and the unit.
from that to which the receiver is connected.
Do NOT use the device in a manner such that it is in direct
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
contact with the body (i.e. on the lap or in a breast pocket). Such use
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is will likely exceed FCC RF safety exposure limits. See
subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/ for more information on RF exposure
harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference safety.
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Responsible party
RF Safety Exposure (North America) (Europe)
To Radio Frequency Energy (SAR) Radio transmitting devices radiate Palm Inc. Roy Bedlow
950 W. Maude Ave. Buckhurst Court
Radio Frequency (RF) energy during its operation. RF energy can be
Sunnyvale, CA 94085 London Road
absorbed into the human body and potentially can cause adverse USA Wokingham, Berkshire RG40 1PA,
health effects if excessive levels are absorbed. The unit of www.palm.com UK
measurement for human exposure to RF energy is “Specific
Absorption Rate” (SAR).

REGULATORY INFORMATION 261


Declaration of Conformity Person responsible for making this declaration:

We, Palm Inc., declare under sole responsibility that the product:

Model name: Treo 750

Description: PDA phone

Is in conformity with the following standards and/or other normative


document: David Woo/Sr Compliance Engineer
Sunnyvale/August 31, 2006
• ETSI EN 301 511

• ETSI EN 301 908-1 Antenna Care/Unauthorized Modifications


• ETSI EN 301 908-2 Use only the supplied integral antenna. Unauthorized antenna
• ETSI EN 300 328 modifications or attachments could damage the unit and may violate
FCC regulations. Any changes or modifications not expressly
• ETSI EN 301 489-1/-7/-17/-24 approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the
• EN60950-1 user’s authority to operate the equipment.

• EN 50360 Potentially Unsafe Areas


We hereby declare that the above named product is in conformance Potentially explosive atmospheres: Turn off your smartphone when
to all essential requirements of the RTTE Directive 1999/5/EC. you are in any areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere, such as
The conformity assessment procedure referred to Article 10 and fueling areas (gas or petrol stations) or storage facilities for fuel or
detailed in Annex IV of directive 1999/5/EC has been related to chemicals.
Articles: Declaration of Conformity
• R&TTE Article 3.1 (a) Health and Safety
Treo 750
• R&TTE Article 3.1 (b) EMC
Palm declares that the above model of Treo 750 is compliant with the
• R&TTE Article 3.2 Spectrum Usage regulations below. The declaration applies to the smartphone and its
associated accessories (power supply, headset, and USB cable)
Identification mark 0984 (notified body) CE.
where applicable.
This identification mark is permanently provided on the device label.

The technical documentation relevant to the above equipment will be Maximum SAR Values (W/kg) CE
held at:
Band GSM 900 PCS 1800 WCDMA 2100
Palm Inc.
950 W Maude Avenue Head SAR 0.741 0.244 0.447
Sunnyvale, CA. 94085
U.S.A.
To view the highest reported (FCC) SAR values of the Treo 750, visit
www.palm.com/41057.

262 REGULATORY INFORMATION


FCC OET Bulletin 65 Supplement C

Safety: EN 60950: 2000 (Jan-2000)


Using TTY
A TTY (also known as TDD or text telephone) is a
Radiated Emissions: EN 55022
telecommunications device that allows people who are deaf or
FCC ID: O8F-KITT hard of hearing, or who have speech or language disabilities, to
communicate by telephone.
IC ID: 3905A-KITT
Your Palm Treo 750 smartphone is compatible with select TTY
devices. You can connect a TTY/TDD machine to your smartphone
through the headset jack, but you cannot use your headset jack
with a headset or hands-free kit while this mode is enabled.
Please check with the manufacturer of your TTY device for
connectivity information and to ensure that the TTY device
supports digital wireless transmission.

To use TTY, you may need to make additional arrangements with


your wireless service provider. Please contact your wireless
service provider’s customer service department for more
information.

1 Press Start and select Settings.

2 Select Personal, and then select Phone.

3 Select Phone.

4 Select the TTY/TDD list, and then select either On or Off.

5 Press OK. A keyboard icon appears at the top of your Today


screen whenever TTY is enabled.

To disable TTY, repeat the steps above.

Operational Warnings
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ON SAFE AND EFFICIENT
OPERATION. Read this information before using your integrated
multi-service portable radio.

For the safe and efficient operation of your radio, observe these
guidelines:

Potentially Unsafe Areas/Potentially explosive


atmospheres Obey all signs and instructions regarding turning off
your smartphone. In particular, turn off your smartphone when you
are in any areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere, such as

REGULATORY INFORMATION 263


fueling areas (gas or petrol stations, below deck on boats), storage Interference to Other Electronic Devices RF energy may affect
facilities for fuel or chemicals, blasting areas and areas near electrical improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic operating and
blasting caps, and areas where there are chemicals or particles (such entertainment systems in motor vehicles. Check with the
as metal powders, grains, and dust) in the air. manufacturer or representative to determine if these systems are
adequately shielded from external RF energy. Also check with the
Interference to Medical and Personal Electronic Devices Most
manufacturer of any equipment that has been added to the vehicle.
but not all electronic equipment is shielded from RF signals and
certain electronic equipment may not be shielded against the RF Repetitive Motion Injuries When using the keyboard or playing
signals from your smartphone. games on your smartphone, you may experience discomfort in your
neck, shoulders, hands, arms, of other parts of the body. To avoid any
Pacemakers The Health Industry Manufacturers Association
injury, such as tendonitis, carpal tunnel syndrome, or other
recommends that a minimum separation of six inches (6") be
musculoskeletal disorder, make sure to take necessary breaks from
maintained between a smartphone and a pacemaker to avoid
use, take longer rests (such as several hours) if discomfort or tiring
potential interference with the pacemaker. These recommendations
begins, and see a doctor if discomfort persists.
are consistent with the independent research by the
recommendations of Wireless Technology Research. Blackouts and Seizures Blinking lights, such as those experienced
with television or playing video games, may cause some people to
Persons with pacemakers should:
experience blackout or seizure, even if never experienced before. In
• ALWAYS keep the smartphone more than six inches from their the event a smartphone user should experience any disorientation,
pacemaker when the smartphone is turned ON. loss of awareness, convulsion, eye or muscle twitching or other
involuntary movements, stop use immediately and consult a doctor.
• Not carry the smartphone in a breast pocket.
Individuals with personal or family history of such events should
• Use the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimize the potential for consult a doctor before using the device. To limit the possibility of
interference. such symptoms, wherever possible every hour take a minimum of 15
minutes, use in a well lighted area, view the screen from the farthest
• Turn the smartphone OFF immediately if you have any reason to
distance and avoid exposure to blinking lights if you are tired.
suspect that interference is taking place.
Aircraft While in aircraft, follow all instructions regarding the
Audio Safety Some hearing aids may be affected by some digital
operation of your smartphone. Use of your smartphone while on
smartphone models. You may want to consult your doctor in the
board on aircraft must be done in accordance in compliance with
event of you experience interference with your hearing aid while
airline instructions and regulations.
using your smartphone. When using the speakerphone feature, it is
recommended that you place your smartphone at a safe distance Vehicles with Air Bags Your smartphone should not be placed in a
from your ear. position that would affect the operation of air bag deployment or in a
position that, should the air bag inflate, could propel the smartphone.
Other Medical Devices If you use any other personal medical
Air bags will inflate with great force and care should be taken to
device, consult the manufacturer of your device to determine if it is
protect within a vehicle that has air bags.
adequately shielded from external RF energy. Your physician may be
able to assist you in obtaining this information. Battery Your smartphone includes an internal lithium ion battery.
Please note that use of certain data applications can result in heavy
Turn your smartphone OFF in health care facilities when any
battery use and may require frequent battery charging. Any disposal
regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or
of the smartphone must comply with laws and regulations pertaining
health care facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive
to lithium ion batteries.
to external RF energy.

264 REGULATORY INFORMATION


Driving Safety Tips Overview speaker phone accessory, take advantage of these devices if
available to you.
Always obey all laws and regulations on the use of the smartphone in
your driving area. 3 Position your smartphone within easy reach. Make sure you place
your smartphone within easy reach and where you can grab it
Safety — Your most important call. The Wireless Industry reminds
without removing your eyes from the road. If you get an incoming
you to use your smartphone safely when driving.
call at an inconvenient time, let your voice mail answer it for you.
1 Get to know your smartphone and its features, such as speed-dial
4 Suspend conversations during hazardous driving conditions or
and redial.
situations. Let the person you are speaking to know you are
2 When available, use a hands-free device. driving; if necessary, suspend the call in heavy traffic or
hazardous weather conditions. Rain, sleet, snow and ice can be
3 Position your smartphone within easy reach.
hazardous, but so is heavy traffic. As a driver, your first
4 Let the person you are speaking to know you are driving; if responsibility is to pay attention to the road.
necessary, suspend the call in heavy traffic or hazardous weather
5 Do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving. If you
conditions.
are reading an address book or business card while driving a car,
5 Do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving. or writing a “to do” list, then you are not watching where you are
going. It’s common sense. Don’t get caught in a dangerous
6 Dial sensibly and assess the traffic; if possible, place calls when
situation because you are reading or writing and not paying
you are not moving or before pulling into traffic.
attention to the road or nearby vehicles.
7 Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations that may
6 Dial sensibly and assess the traffic; if possible, place calls when
divert your attention from the road.
you are not moving or before pulling into traffic. Try to plan your
8 Dial 9-1-1 to report serious emergencies -it’s free from your calls before you begin your trip, or attempt to coincide your calls
smartphone! with times you may be stopped at a stop sign, red light or
otherwise stationary. But if you need to dial while driving, follow
9 Use your smartphone to help others in emergencies.
this simple tip-dial only a few numbers, check the road and your
10 Call roadside assistance or a special non-emergency wireless mirrors, then continue.
number when necessary.
7 Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations that may
be distracting. Stressful or emotional conversations and driving
Driving Safety Tips Details do not mix-they are distracting and even dangerous when you are
1 Get to know your smartphone and its features such as speed-dial behind the wheel. Make people you are talking with aware you
and redial. Carefully read your instruction manual and learn to are driving and if necessary, suspend phone conversations which
take advantage of valuable features most smartphone models have the potential to divert your attention from the road.
offer including, automatic redial and memory dial-most
8 Use your smartphone to call for help. Your smartphone is one of
smartphone models can store up to 99 numbers in memory dial.
the greatest tools you can own to protect yourself and your
Also, work to memorize the smartphone keypad so you can use
family in dangerous situations-with your smartphone at your side,
the speed-dial function without taking your attention off the road.
help is only three numbers away. Dial 9-1-1 in the case of fire,
2 When available, use a hands-free device. A number of hands-free traffic accident, road hazard, or medical emergencies.
smartphone accessories are readily available today. Whether you Remember, 9-1-1is a free call on your smartphone!
choose an installed mounted device for your smartphone or a

REGULATORY INFORMATION 265


9 Use your smartphone to help others in emergencies. Your
smartphone provides you a perfect opportunity to be a “good
Samaritan” in your community. If you see an auto accident, crime
in progress, or other serious emergency where lives are in
danger, call 9-1-1, as you would want others to do for you.

10 Call roadside assistance or a special wireless non-emergency


assistance number when necessary. Certain situations you
encounter while driving may require attention, but are not urgent
enough to merit a call to 9-1-1. But you can still use your
smartphone to lend a hand. If you see a broken-down vehicle
posing no serious hazard, a broken traffic signal, a minor traffic
accident where no one appears injured, or a vehicle you know to When you receive a call on your wireless telephone, the message
be stolen, call roadside assistance or other special travels through the telephone network until it reaches a base station
non-emergency wireless number. close to your wireless phone. Then the base station sends out radio
waves that are detected by a receiver in your telephone, where the
NOTICE FOR CONSUMERS WITH HEARING signals are changed back into the sound of a voice.
DISABILITIES
The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and the Food and
Digital Wireless Phones to be Compatible with Hearing Aids On Drug Administration (FDA) each regulate wireless telephones. FCC
July 10, 2003, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) ensures that all wireless phones sold in the United States follow
modified the exemption for wireless phones under the Hearing Aid safety guidelines that limit radio frequency (RF) energy. FDA monitors
Compatibility Act of 1988. This means that wireless phone the health effects of wireless telephones. Each agency has the
manufacturers and service providers must make digital wireless authority to take action if a wireless phone produces hazardous levels
phones accessible to individuals who use hearing aids. of RF energy.
For more information, please go to the FCC’s Consumer Alert on FDA derives its authority to regulate wireless telephones from the
accessibility of digital wireless phones at http://www.fcc.gov/cgb/ Radiation Control provisions of the Federal Food, Drug, and Cosmetic
consumerfacts/accessiblewireless.html. Act (originally enacted as the Radiation Control for Health and Safety
Act of 1968). [http://www.fda.gov/cdrh/comp/eprc.html].
Wireless telephones are hand-held phones with built-in antennas,
often called cell, mobile, or PCS phones. These phones are popular FCC derives its authority to regulate wireless telephones from the
with callers because they can be carried easily from place to place. National Environmental Policy Act of 1969 (NEPA) and the
Telecommunications Act of 1996
Wireless telephones are two-way radios. When you talk into a
wireless telephone, it picks up your voice and converts the sound to http://www.fcc.gov/telecom.html]. Updated 7/16/2003
radio frequency energy (or radio waves). The radio waves travel Hands-Free Capability All CTIA Certified portable products provide
through the air until they reach a receiver at a nearby base station. the consumer with a toll-free number for the purchase of a
The base station then sends your call through the telephone network compatible hands-free device. 1-800-881-7256
until it reaches the person you are calling.
STATIC ELECTRICITY, ESD, AND YOUR PALM DEVICE
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can cause damage to electronic devices
if discharged into the device, so you should take steps to avoid such
an occurrence.

266 REGULATORY INFORMATION


Description of ESD Static electricity is an electrical charge caused Conditions that enhance ESD occurrences Conditions that can
by the buildup of excess electrons on the surface of a material. To contribute to the buildup of static electricity in the environment
most people, static electricity and ESD are nothing more than include the following:
annoyances. For example, after walking over a carpet while scuffing
• Low relative humidity.
your feet, building up electrons on your body, you may get a shock—
the discharge event—when you touch a metal doorknob. This little • Material type (The type of material gathering the charge. For
shock discharges the built-up static electricity. example, synthetics are more prone to static buildup than natural
fibers like cotton.)
ESD-susceptible equipment Even a small amount of ESD can
harm circuitry, so when working with electronic devices, take • The rapidity with which you touch, connect, or disconnect
measures to help protect your electronic devices, including your electronic devices.
Palm® device, from ESD harm. While Palm has built protections
While you should always take appropriate precautions to discharge
against ESD into its products, ESD unfortunately exists and, unless
0ectricity, if you are in an environment where you notice ESD events,
neutralized, could build up to levels that could harm your equipment.
you may want to take extra precautions to protect your electronic
Any electronic device that contains an external entry point for
equipment against ESD.
plugging in anything from cables to docking stations is susceptible to
entry of ESD. Devices that you carry with you, such as your Palm Precaution against hearing loss Protect your hearing. Listening to this
device, build up ESD in a unique way because the static electricity device at full volume for a long period of time can damage your
that may have built up on your body is automatically passed to the hearing.
device. Then, when the device is connected to another device such
A pleine puissance, l'écoute prolongée du baladeur peut
as a docking station, a discharge event can occur.
endommager l'oreille de l'utilisateur. Consultez notre site web
Precautions against ESD Make sure to discharge any built-up www.palm.com/fr pour plus d'informations.
static electricity from yourself and your electronic devices before
touching an electronic device or connecting one device to another.
The recommendation from Palm is that you take this precaution
before connecting your Palm device to your computer, placing the
device in a cradle, or connecting it to any other device. You can do
this in many ways, including the following:

• Ground yourself when you’re holding your device by


simultaneously touching a metal surface that is at earth ground. Waste disposal Please recycle appropriately. For appropriate recycling
For example, if your computer has a metal case and is plugged and disposal instructions please visit: www.palm.com/environment.
into a standard three-prong grounded outlet, touching the case
should discharge the ESD on your body.

• Increase the relative humidity of your environment.

• Install ESD-specific prevention items, such as grounding mats.

REGULATORY INFORMATION 267


268 REGULATORY INFORMATION
Specifications
Radio • Dual mode GSM/UMTS phone
• GSM 850/900/1800/1900 quad band
• UMTS 850/1900/2100 tri-band
• GPRS Multi-slot Class 10, Class B
• EDGE
• UMTS PS data
• HSDPA Category 12
Phone features • Personal speakerphone
• Hands-free headset jack (2.5 mm, 3-barrel connector)
• Microphone mute option
• TTY compatible
Processor technology • Samsung processor—300MHz
Expansion • miniSD card slot
Battery • Rechargeable Lithium Ion
• 1200mAh power
• Removable for replacement
• 3 hours full charge time
Operating system • Windows Mobile Pocket PC Phone Edition 5.0
Camera • Still image capture resolution:1280 x 1024, 1.3 megapixel
• 2x digital zoom

SPECIFICATIONS 269
Size • 4.44 in. x 2.34 in. x 0.84 in.
(112.9mm x 59.3mm x 21.3mm)
Weight • 5.4 ounces (154 grams)
Connectivity • Infrared (1.0 compliant)
• Bluetooth wireless technology (1.2 compliant)
®

Display • Touch-sensitive LCD screen (includes stylus)


• 65,536 colors (16-bit color)
• Resolution: 240 x 240
• User-adjustable brightness
Keyboard • Built-in QWERTY keyboard plus 5-way navigator
• Backlight for low lighting conditions

270 SPECIFICATIONS
Included software • Today/Phone (includes • Notes
Speed Dial and Dial Pad) • Calculator
• Messaging (text, • ActiveSync ®

multimedia, and email)


• Excel Mobile
• Internet Explorer Mobile
• Word Mobile
(web browser)
• PowerPoint Mobile
• Camera
• Voice Command
• Pictures & Videos
• Quick Tour
• Windows Media Player
Mobile • Search
• File Explorer • Terminal Services
• Contacts • Picsel PDF Viewer
• Calendar • Bluetooth Plug-in
• Tasks
System requirements • Windows 2000 or XP (later versions may also be
supported)
• 32MB of available memory (RAM)
• 170MB of free hard disk space
• Available USB port
Operating and storage • 32°F to 104°F (0°C to 40°C)
temperature range • 5% to 90% RH

SPECIFICATIONS 271
272 SPECIFICATIONS
Index instant messages 113
Internet Explorer 117
accounts
conference calls and 46
menu items 20, 21, 22 customer service support
SYMBOLS Messaging app 101 for 253
! on battery icon 10 Notes application 161 missing phone numbers
on-device documentation and 14
NUMERICS 253 preventing unauthorized
112 calls 35, 214 online address books 95 use of 214, 221
1st day of week option 158 options in lists 22 removing email 90
3GP files 142 Outlook folders 241 setting up email 88
3GPP files 102, 138 Palm online support 253 setting up instant
3GPP2 files 102, 138 PDF Viewer 169 messaging 113
5-way navigator 5, 17, 19, Phone Settings screen 13 troubleshooting 244
250 Pictures & Videos Accounts tab 90, 94, 96
911 calls 35, 214 application 138 action keys 5, 20
Quick Tour 253 actions 20, 207
A remote files 225 activating items on screen 20
AC charger 9, 74 speed-dial buttons 36 active call info 42
accented characters 26, 27 spreadsheet templates active calls. See phone calls
accessing 178 ActiveSync
ActiveSync 73 Streaming Media defined 255
alternate characters 26 application 144 installing 68
applications 28, 210 Tasks application 159 opening 73
calculator 201 Tasks entry bar 161 receiving email and 92
Calendar application 153 the Internet 224, 236 synchronizing with 67, 68,
Contacts application 151 Today screen 12, 29 72, 229, 239
Dial Pad 38 web pages 117, 119, 122, troubleshooting 229, 239–
File Explorer 190 247 243
information 29, 221 Wireless Manager 33

INDEX 273
ActiveSync icon 73, 76, 167, caller ID pictures 151 multiple recipients and
255 connections 225 102
ActiveSync Plug-in for contacts 44, 57, 151 selecting 20, 247
Bluetooth 81 document templates 170 synchronizing 241
Add a new VPN server expansion cards 197 adjusting screen brightness
connection option 225 files to playlists 146 208
Add Contact prompt 44 folders 173 Advanced tab (Power
Add Favorite dialog box 120 notes 152, 161, 163 Settings) 223
Add Media command 104 online address book 94– advancing slides 175, 176
Add Picture command 104 95 After calls from numbers…
Add Recipient command 101 passkeys 126 option 58
Add Server Source command signatures 96, 111 Agenda View (calendar) 153
77 speed-dial buttons 48 alarm clock 220
Add Sound command 104 spreadsheets 176 alarm sounds 220
Add to Contacts command tasks 159 alarms
107 untimed events 155, 156 adding 154, 160
Add to Favorites command address book 94, 95, 97, setting 208, 220
120 153, 241 turning on and off 207
Add to Personal Address Address List Lookup 189 Alarms tab 220
Book command 241 address messaging options albums 138
adding 97 alert tones. See alarms;
a second call 44 Address tab 94, 97 ringtones
applications 210 addresses aligning the screen 209
appointments 154, 155 adding 151 alignment settings
attachments to email 91, checking for 97 documents 172
98, 190 copying 241 spreadsheets 176
bookmarks 119 entering email 91, 97 Allow cookies check box 123
bulleted or numbered lists entering web 30, 118 Allow USB connections
172 looking up corporate 189 check box 240

274 INDEX
Alt key 24, 255 included with device 271 marking as private 156
alternate characters 26, 27 installing 191–192, 249, reminders for 154
alternate characters list 26, 250 scheduling repeating 155
27 losing information in 231 viewing 153
AMR files 102 moving through 18, 19 Appointments tab 158
animation 142, 174, 175 moving to expansion cards Area code option 153
anniversaries 156 200 arrow icons 17
Answer button 39 opening 28, 199, 210 ascending sort order 182
answering the phone 39, 45 phone calls and 43 ASF files 138
antenna 262 reinstalling 229, 231 Assign a program list 211
Appearance tab 205, 210 running from expansion attachments
application icons 28, 211 cards 199, 250 adding 91, 98, 190
applications running multiple 28 downloading 93
See also third-party selecting 28 embedded objects in 94
applications storing 250 internal memory and 250
associating with buttons synchronizing information opening 93
211 in 69, 83 storing 93, 97
battery life and 11 troubleshooting 231, 233 troubleshooting 246
caution for hard resets and turning sounds on or off Attendees option 156
231 for 207 audio 39, 137, 142, 264
choosing menu items in viewing memory usage for auto-completion options 213
21, 22 222 AutoCorrect command 141
closing 28, 222 Appointment tab 154 Autofill option 180
copying 200 appointments AutoFilter command 183
customizing 210–214 adding 154 AutoFilter settings
deleting 194, 250 appearing in wrong time (spreadsheets) 177
displaying 28, 222 slots 242 auto-keyguard feature 214,
downloading 191, 192 deleting 158 215
error reporting for 221 hiding 156 Auto-Keyguard list 215

INDEX 275
Automatically download purchasing 9 hands-free devices and
MMS messages check removing 231, 232 52, 53, 54
box 110 replacing 232–233 overview 124
auto-off interval 255 specifications for 269 synchronizing over 81
available memory 222 viewing remaining power Bluetooth devices
available storage space 222 for 223 beaming to 196
viewing status of 63 connecting to 52–54,
B
battery door 8 124–127
back view (device) 6 battery door release 6 creating partnerships for
backgrounds 133, 140, 147, battery icon 10 125
205 Battery Power tab 25 discovery setting for 127
backing up information 65, battery status icons 63 phone calls and 54
229, 231 Battery tab 223 receiving information over
backlight (keyboard) 24, 223 Beam File command 195 125, 127
backlight shut-off interval 25 Beam tab 197 sending information over
Backspace key 20, 24, 26 Beam… command 196 125, 127
backup and restore beaming 12, 190, 195–197, troubleshooting 237
application 76 255 Bluetooth icon 53, 64, 124
backup utilities 229, 231, birthdays 156 Bluetooth Plug-in 125, 129
232, 243 blank screens 234 Bluetooth Settings screen
backups, restoring 232, 243 Block incoming calls list 58 124–127
battery Block outgoing calls list 58 Bluetooth wireless
Bluetooth connections blocking phone calls 58 technology 115, 195, 255
and 124 Bluetooth connections BMP files 138
charging 9–10 battery level and 124 Bold option 172
conserving power for 223 battery life and 11 bookmarks 119
disposing of 232, 264 checking status of 53 See also favorites
inserting 8 communicating over 52 border highlight 19
maximizing life of 11–12 borders 176

276 INDEX
brightness, adjusting 208 Buttons screen 211 Call Log 38
browsing files and folders Buttons tab (Options) 147 Call Sender command 107
190, 200 call waiting 45
C
browsing the web. See web call-barring password 58
browsing CAB files 192 caller ID applications 249
built-in applications 194, 271 calculations 179, 201 caller ID blocking 44
built-in camera. See camera Calculator application 201 caller ID pictures 133, 151
bulleted lists 172 calculator buttons 202 caller IDs 59
bullets 169 Calculator icon 201 call-waiting notifications 59
Burst mode 134 calendar camcorder icon 134
button settings 147 adding items to 155, 156 camera
buttons displaying 153 battery life and 11
assigning to media files removing events 158 capturing videos with 135
148 setting alarms for 154 specifications for 269
assigning voice setting options for 158 taking pictures 133–134
commands to 211 unavailable slots on 157 troubleshooting 248
associating with Calendar application camera lens 6
applications 211 adding contacts and 151 Camera Preview Mode 248
creating speed-dial 48 customizing 158–159 camera settings 136–137
disabling 215 managing schedules with Camera tab 137
editing speed-dial 49 154–158 Cancel Bluetooth command
opening menus and 20 selecting views 153 54
reassigning 211 starting 153 Cancel Mute command 43
selecting or activating 19 untimed events in 155 capitalization 25, 214
showing voicemail 49 calendar options 158–159 Capitalize first letter of
turning sounds on or off Calendar views 153, 158, sentence check box 214
for 207 159 Caps Lock icon 25
Buttons icon 211 call forwarding 47 Caps Lock mode 25
Buttons list 211 call forwarding icon 47 captions 104

INDEX 277
Carrier picture or video resolution chronological list of calls 38
call forwarding and 47 134, 135, 248 Clear Cookies button 123
conference calls and 46 PIN numbers 217 Clear History button 123
TTY devices and 263 speed-dial buttons 49 Clear Now Playing command
cascading menus 22 text 170 146
case-sensitive searching text size 208 Clear Type tab 208
171, 184 character entry 27 clearing web links 123
categories character sets 122 Clock & Alarms icon 219,
contacts 152 characters 220
events 157 capitalizing 25, 214 Clock & Alarms Settings
playlists 145 entering 24, 25, 179, 213 screen 219, 220
tasks 160, 161 phone calls and 49 closing
cell patterns (spreadsheets) scrolling 18 applications 28, 222
176 text messages and 101, menus 22
cell phones. See wireless 102 notification messages 106
phones typing alternate 26 screens 19
certificates 117, 221 charge indicator 5, 10 color settings 248
Certificates icon 221 charger cable 9 color themes 205, 210
Certificates screen 221 charging command button 212, 213
changes, undoing 141 device 9, 11 commands 20, 212
changing device battery 9–10 See also menus; voice
alarm sounds 220 charging status 10 commands
color themes 205, 210 Chart command 183, 184 company lists 33
connections 225 chart options 184 company names 38, 152
contacts 152 charts 177, 183, 184 comparisons 183
date and time settings 219 Chat icon 108 completed tasks 160
email accounts 90 chat sessions 107, 111 compliancy statement 262
information 71, 184 Chat tab 111 components (Treo device) 1
check boxes 19 compressed files 191

278 INDEX
computers Connect via Bluetooth precautions for 267
connecting to 71, 74 command 81 removing Bluetooth 127
enabling dial-up Connect via IR command 82 setting up 224–226
networking for 128 connecting setting up wireless 128–
installing from 193 charger cable 9 130
reinstalling desktop device to PCs 74 timing out 244
software on 229 headsets 50 troubleshooting 235–238,
synchronizing with 71, 82, to a headset 126 247
83 to Bluetooth devices 52– trusted devices and 127
system requirements 71 54, 124–127 Connections icon 224
viewing videos and to hands-free car kits 52, Connections screen 224,
pictures on 141 126 225, 237, 238
Conference button 46 to mobile networks 235 Connections tab 197, 224
conference calls 46 to service providers 224 connectivity specs 270
confidential events 157 to the Internet 129, 224, conserving battery power
Confidential option 157 236 223
configurations to TTY devices 57 contact categories 152
troubleshooting 237 to VPNs 225 contacts
Configure Server command to web sites 117, 127 adding 44, 57, 151
246 connection icons 226 addressing messages to
configuring Connection Settings 91, 97, 101, 103
data services 237 command 240 assigning ringtones to 49,
mail servers 246 connections 56, 139, 152
TTY devices 57 adding 225 changing 152
Confirm message deletions changing 225 displaying 152
check box 110 displaying 225 linking speed-dial buttons
confirmation messages 112 ending 226 to 48
Connect command 225 losing 238 looking up 30, 36, 153
manually starting 225 making calls to 36

INDEX 279
personalizing 56 corporate networks 221 text messages 101
removing 152 corporate servers 225, 246 untimed events 155, 156
saving information for 44 coupling 251 video ringtones 139
selecting communication coverage area 12, 33, 235 workbooks 177
method for 37 Create chat from messages credentials 226, 244
sending messages to 102, option 111 cropping pictures 141
156 creating currency symbols 209
viewing details list for 37 appointments 154, 155 Currency tab 209
Contacts application 151– bookmarks 119 customer assistance 253
153 bulleted or numbered lists Customize the playlists…
Contacts list 37, 44, 101, 172 check box 143
107, 152 caller ID pictures 151 customizing
context-sensitive menus 22 connections 225 applications 210–214
continuous playback (slides) contacts 44, 57, 151 Calendar 158–159
176 documents 168, 170 camera 136–137
cookies 117 email messages 90 chat settings 111
Copy command 121, 140, folders 173 Contacts application 152
171, 200 multimedia messages 102 dates and time 219
copying notes 161, 163 email settings 96
addresses 241 online address book 94– Excel Mobile 186
applications 200 95 format settings 209
items in folders 191 partnerships 125 Internet Explorer Mobile
phone numbers 37, 39, passkeys 126 122–123
122 playlists 145 Media Player Mobile 146
pictures and videos 139 signatures 96, 111 Messaging application
text 121, 171 speed-dial buttons 48 110–112
copyrighted items 139 spreadsheets 176 network settings 112
corporate mail systems 225, tasks 159 Notes application 163
246 templates 107, 170, 178 phone 54–62

280 INDEX
system settings 219–224 decompression utility 191 directory services 95
system sounds 206 default document template documents 174
tasks 161 174 email accounts 90
Today screen 205 default format settings 209 events 158
voicemail system 49, 55 Default mode option 163 favorites 120
Word Mobile 174 Default option 118 files 191, 250
Cut command 140, 171 default PINs 216 items from libraries 145
cutting. See deleting Default template option 164 items from playlists 146
Default zoom level options items in folders 190
D
214 messages 97, 109, 110
daily schedules 153 defined names notes 163
data 231 (spreadsheets) 181 partnerships 127, 238
See also information delays 34, 237 pictures 141
data connection icons 226 Delete Appointment speed-dial buttons 50
data filters 158, 183 command 158 tasks 161
data formats 209 Delete Cells command 185 text 20
data service icons 236 Delete command 109, 174, web files 123
data service providers 224, 186 workbooks 186
236, 245 Delete Contact command worksheets 186
data services 1, 236 152 descending sort order 182
data transmission speeds 1 Delete Files button 123 Desktop option 118
date format settings 209 Delete Task command 161 desktop software 229, 255
Date tab 209 Deleted folder 98, 250 See also applications;
dates 180, 209, 219 deleting software
See also calendar applications 194, 250 device
Day View 153, 158 Bluetooth connections additional information for
day-planner formats 153 127 253
decimal places 209 certificates 221 caution for electrostatic
decimal symbols 209 contacts 152 discharge and 267

INDEX 281
caution for resetting 231 resetting 217, 230–232, radio frequency emissions
caution for storing 6 235 and 261, 264
charging 9, 11 setting up 7–14 transferring information
compatibility with specifications for 269 from 229
third-party vendors 71 system requirements for troubleshooting 237
compatible hands-free 271 Devices tab 125, 238
devices for 52 third-party applications and diagnostic information 221
compliancy statement for 248, 249 Dial Lookup list 13
262 troubleshooting 253 Dial Pad 37, 38, 39
components of 1, 5–7 turning on and off 33, 262 dialing 12, 34–37, 38, 49
connecting to PCs 74 unlocking 217 dialog boxes 256
disabling touch-sensitivity updating information on dial-up networking 127, 128
for 215 65, 71 digit grouping 209
disposing of 264 usage guidelines for 261, digital cameras 138
features described 1 265 See also camera
freeing space on 194, 250 device names. See digital certificates 117, 221
getting help with 227, 253 usernames dimmed images 234
getting phone number for Device Setup Wizard 143 Direct Push Technology 76
13 devices directory service 94, 95, 97
locking 217 See also Bluetooth Disable touchscreen check
losing 76, 218 devices; device box 216
low lighting conditions and battery life and 11 Disconnect Bluetooth
24 beaming to 195 command 82
management tools for 187 compliancy for 263 Disconnect command 226
moving around on 15 configuring TTY/TTD 57 discoverable setting 127
not responding 230, 235, discovering trusted 124, discovering trusted devices
249 125, 127 124, 125, 127
personalizing 203 physically-impaired disk space 271
required items for 2 disabilities and 57 See also memory

282 INDEX
Dismiss button 42 space on expansion cards downloading
display formats 209 200, 222 applications 191, 192
Display message on screen tasks 160, 161 attachments 93
check box 208 videos 133, 138, 141 email 79, 92
display options (web) 118 web pages 117, 118 files 121
display settings 208–210 wireless settings 224 images 121, 142
See also screen DOC files 168 multimedia messages
displaying document file types 168, 174 105, 110
alternate characters 26 documentation 2, 253 Palm-specific information
animated images 142 documents and updates 253
applications on device 28 See also Word Mobile pictures 138
appointments 153 application ringtones 54
calendar 153 creating 168, 170 videos 142
contacts 37, 152 deleting 174 Downloads favorite 121
current connection 225 finding and replacing text downward-pointing arrows
daily schedules 153 in 170 22
events 155, 157 moving or copying text in drained battery 11
folder contents 190 171 drawing 162
memory usage 222 opening 170 drivers 230
multimedia messages 107 organizing 173 driving safety tips 265
notifications 56, 208 saving 168, 170, 171, 174 Drop and Answer command
on-device documentation sending 85 45
253 setting margins for 172 drop-down lists
PDF files 169 spell-checking 173 accessing 22
pictures 133, 138, 141 supported features for 169 exiting 23
power settings 223 unsupported features for highlighting in 18, 23
Quick Tour documentation 169 scrolling through 18
253 documents list 174 selecting items in 20, 23
running applications 222 DOT files 168 drop-down menus 22

INDEX 283
DUN connections 128–130 getting from corporate Enable fixed dialing check
See also dial-up servers 225, 246 box 61
networking getting from Exchange Enable local network time
Servers 92 check box 220
E
internal memory and 250 encoding options 122
earpiece 5, 251 priority settings for 91 encryption 117
echoes 251 receiving attachments End Show command 175
EDGE connections 256 with 93 End User License
Edit command 140, 152 reply options for 97 Agreement 2
Edit Server Settings screen requirements for 1 ending
77 selecting addresses 20 active calls 43
Edit Speed Dial command sending 92, 98, 119, 245 data connections 226
49, 50 synchronizing 11, 92, 239, playback 144
editing. See changing 245, 246 wireless connections 130
electrostatic discharge 266 troubleshooting 244–246 endnotes 169
email email accounts entering
adding address book for changing 90 alternate characters 26, 27
94–95 deleting 90 data in spreadsheets 177,
adding attachments to 91, setting up 88 180
98, 190 troubleshooting 244 information 25–26
addressing 91, 97 email applications 247 numbers 24, 25
creating 90 E-mail button 92 owner information 218
deleting 97, 98 email client software 246 passkeys 53, 126
dialing from 39 email message icons 109 passwords 78, 89, 217
downloading 79, 92 embedded images 94 phone numbers 12, 34,
entering contacts and 151, emergency calls 35, 214 37, 38
156 emoticons 102 PINs 216
forwarding 95 Enable Clear Type check box text 213, 214
208 web addresses 30, 118

284 INDEX
Entire column option 185 reminders for 154 synchronizing with 11, 69,
Entire row option 185 selecting sounds for 208 82, 243, 244
entry fields setting notification troubleshooting 244, 246
deleting text in 20 preferences for 207 exiting applications 28, 222
highlighting in 18, 20 Events check box 207 expanding lists in fields 23
moving to 18 Excel files 165 expansion card slot 6, 197,
opening drop-down lists in See also Excel Mobile; 269
23 spreadsheets expansion cards
scrolling through 18 Excel Mobile application as storage medium 250
Erase all data? prompt 232 customizing 186 browsing on 200
erasing. See deleting display settings for 178 displaying available space
error messages 207, 243 overview 176 on 200, 222
error reporting 221–222 searching in 184 inserting 197–198
Error Reporting icon 222 starting 177 installing apps on 193
Error Reporting screen 222 supported features 176 moving apps to 200
errors 221, 235, 243 unsupported features 177 moving information to
ESD (electrostatic discharge) Excel Mobile icon 177 173, 185, 200
266 Exchange ActiveSync 246, opening items on 199
Even when roaming check 256, 259 removing 198
box 110 Exchange Address Book 241 renaming 201
event categories 157 Exchange Server credentials searching on 189, 190
event icons 159 screen 244 storing attachments on
Event list 207 Exchange Server sync 93, 97
events options 78, 244 transferring files to 142,
creating 155, 156 Exchange Servers 146, 199, 200
deleting 158 accessing 153 types supported 197
filtering 157 getting email from 92 extensions (phone) 49
hiding 156 setting up accounts for external power sources 223
marking as sensitive 156 77–79 External Power tab 25

INDEX 285
Extra Digits button 41, 49 files text 170
Extra Digits text box 49 accessing from corporate firewalls 239
Extract command 46 accounts 225 5-way navigator 5, 17, 19,
browsing 190 250
F
decompressing 191 fixed dialing 61
factory settings 148 deleting 191, 250 folder names 173
factory-installed applications downloading 121 folders
194, 271 moving 173, 191 accessing Outlook 241
favorites 119–120 saving 199 adding documents to 171
See also web pages searching for 189, 190 arranging pictures and
Favorites button 120 selecting multiple 191 videos in 140
Favorites command 120 transferring to expansion browsing 190, 200
FCC Statement 261 cards 142, 146, 199, creating 120, 173
features 1 200 moving items to 173, 185,
Federal Trade Commission fill series (spreadsheets) 180 191
website 222 Filter command 152, 157 opening items in 190
feedback 251 Filter option 160 organizing web favorites in
fields. See entry fields filtering 119, 120
File Explorer 189, 190–191, events 157 sorting contents 190
201 information 152, 183 synchronizing messages
File Explorer icon 190 tasks 160 in 92
file names 171, 173, 189 filters 158, 183 Font color option 172
file types Find Online command 95, Font command 172
displaying 174 153 Font option 172
documents 168 Find/Replace command 170, fonts 169, 172, 176, 208
Media Player 142 184 footers 169
multimedia 102 finding footnotes 169
pictures 138 contacts 30, 36, 153 forgetting passwords 217
videos 138 information 184 format settings 209

286 INDEX
formats, losing 168 Global Address List 94, 95, headset jack 5
formatting 153 headsets
charts 184 Global Address List Lookup configuring as trusted
paragraphs and lists 172 189 devices 124
spreadsheets 176, 181– Glossary 255 connecting 50–51, 126
182 Go to Slide command 175 disabling Keyguard and
system data 209 GPRS connections 256 215
text 172 graphics programs 140 hearing-impaired 57, 263,
Formatting toolbar 173 264, 266
H
forms (web) 119 heat sources 12
formulas 176, 179, 185 Hands Free check box 54, help 227, 253
Forward command 95 126, 238 Help topics 28
forwarding hands-free car kit 50, 54, 126 hiding
messages 95, 107 hands-free devices appointments 156
phone calls 47 connecting to 52 events 156
freeing memory 194, 243, purchasing 266 images 118
250 setting up 50 speed-dial buttons 36
Freeze Panes option 178 tips for 54, 265 Tasks entry bar 161
front view (device) 5 troubleshooting 237, 238 highlight 19
full charge (battery) 9 turning Keyguard on or off Highlight option 172
Full Screen option 118 for 215 highlighting
functions (spreadsheets) hanging indents 173 applications 28
176, 179 hanging up phone 13, 43 items in folders 191
hard resets 217, 231 items on screen 18, 19–
G hardware 1 20
games 11 Hardware buttons check box menu items 21, 22
getting started 2, 3, 12, 253 207 options in lists 18, 23
GIF files 102, 138, 142 headers 169 text 20, 172
headset button 51 Hint tab 218

INDEX 287
hints (passwords) 218 dimmed 234 moving 173, 185, 200
History command 122, 144 downloading 121 protecting 214–218
History list 122, 123 hiding web page 118 removing battery and 232
Hold button 42 incorrect color settings restoring 231, 232
home locations 219 and 248 searching for 171, 184,
Home page option 122 receiving 94 189–190
Hotmail accounts 113 setting background 140, sharing 194
hypertext links. See links 205 sorting 182
troubleshooting web page storing 197, 250
I
247 synchronizing 68, 69, 71,
icons IMAP accounts 88, 93 239
application 28, 211 inactivity 134, 223 transferring 65, 229
battery status 10 Inbox 18, 90, 92, 109 updating 65, 71
data connections 226 Inbox application 90, 94 infrared port. See IR port
data services 236 Include file attachments infrared transmissions 82,
email 109 check box 93 256
events 159 incorrect passwords 217 Input icon 213
message status 109 Indentation setting 172 input options 24, 213
navigator 17 indented lists 169 Input screen 213
phone status 62 indenting text 173 inserting expansion cards
signal-strength 33, 224 indicator light 5, 10, 33 197–198
Identification tab 218 information installation, troubleshooting
Ignore with text message accessing 29, 221 231, 234, 249
command 40 backing up 65, 229, 231 installing
IM messaging 113 changing 71, 184 ActiveSync 68
image file types 138 entering 25–26 applications 191–192,
image files 102, 141, 250 erasing all 238 249, 250
images filtering 152, 183 bonus software 191
See also pictures losing 168, 231 SIM smartcards 7–14

288 INDEX
synchronization software Italics option 172 L
71, 72 Items tab 205 language-impaired 57
VPN clients 225 leading zeros 209
J
Windows drivers 230 left action key 20, 154
instant messages 113 JavaScript 117
Legacy Pocket Word files
instant messaging JPEG files 102 169
applications 249 JPG files 138
libraries (media) 145
internal memory. See Library command 144
K
memory Library list 143
keyboard
Internet 129, 224, 236 Library screen 143, 144, 147
See also web browsing; accessing alternate
characters on 26 Library tab 147
websites lightening bolt 10
dialing from 34
Internet Connection Speed Li-Ion battery 256
option 147 entering information from
25–26, 214 See also battery
Internet Explorer Mobile links
locking 215
browsing with 117–122 clearing web 123
closing 119 scrolling with 18
selecting menu items internal memory and 250
customizing 122–123 media files and 145
from 22
installing from 192 messages and 108, 119
scrolling in 18 setting key combinations
for 211 selecting 19, 119
starting 117 troubleshooting 247
specifications for 270
unsupported elements for list separators 209
117, 247 troubleshooting 250
keyboard backlight 24, 223 List setting 172
IR connections 196 Listen button 42
keyboard icon 24
IR port 6, 82, 195, 256 listening to
ISP mail systems 88 Keyguard 215
Keyguard icon 215 media files 142
ISP settings 224 voicemail messages 42
Known Caller option 55
ISPs (Internet Service lists
Providers) 224, 245 accessing 22

INDEX 289
creating 169, 172 looking up contacts 30, 36, manually closing applications
displaying alternate 153 29
characters and 26 lookup feature 189 MAPI clients 246
exiting 23 losing maps 247
formatting 172 connections 238 margins 172
highlighting in 18, 23 information 168, 231 Match case box 171, 184
navigating web page 119 passwords 217 Match whole words only
scrolling through 18 Treo device 76, 218 check box 171, 184
selecting items in 20, 23 low coverage areas 235 measurement units 209
Lithium Ion battery 256 low lighting conditions 24 media files
See also battery lowercase letters 25 creating playlists for 145
locating formats for 142
M
contacts 30, 36, 153 linking to 145
information 184 magnet 6 playing 143
location-specific information magnification. See zoom synchronizing 143
209, 219 settings transferring 142, 146
Lock icon 118, 139, 217 mail servers 225, 246 troubleshooting 242
Lock screen 217 Main tab 222 media libraries 145
locking Make the device Media Player 242
SIM smartcards 216 discoverable check box Media Player Mobile 142–
spreadsheet rows and 125 148
columns 178 Make this device media players 11
the keyboard 215 discoverable setting 127 Media sync option 143
the screen 215 Manage existing connections meeting requests 94, 95,
Treo device 217 option 225 156, 159
logging in to Manage Folders command memory
corporate servers 225 92 available 271
networks 221 Manage tab 207 freeing 194, 243, 250
management tools 187 low conditions for 29, 222

290 INDEX
running apps and 28, 199 Message validity period chat sessions and 108
storing numbers in 202 option 111 customizing 110–112
viewing expansion card messages email settings in 96
200 See also multimedia messaging options in 105
memory buttons 202 messages; text notification options in 105
memory dial 265 messages; voice notes overview 101
Memory icon 200 adding signatures to 96, play options in 106
memory options (web) 123 111 starting 101
Memory screen 222 addressing 102, 103 status icons in 109
Memory Settings screen 29 automatically resending messaging applications 249
Memory tab 123 111 messaging services 237,
memory usage 222 creating email 90 256
memos. See messages; deleting 97, 109, 110 microphone 5, 43, 137, 251
notes dialing from 39 microphone icon 212
menu items 21 displaying notification 208 Microsoft ActiveSync. See
Menu key 21, 22 displaying status of 109 ActiveSync
menus 20–22 forwarding 95, 107 Microsoft Exchange
Menus icon 210 invalid characters and 102 ActiveSync.See Exchange
Menus screen 210 listening to 42 ActiveSync
Message Details command receiving notifications for Microsoft Office 165
107 105, 106, 111, 237 Microsoft Office Excel 176
message list 108, 109 saving 92 See also spreadsheets
Message Options command sorting 109 Microsoft Office Outlook.
105 storing 250 See Outlook
Message Options screen Messages tab 110 Microsoft Windows Mobile
105 Messaging application software 192
Message Priority list 105 See also text messages; Microsoft Windows Mobile
message status icons 109 multimedia messages website 229
Message tab 96 adding contacts and 151

INDEX 291
Microsoft Word documents. Month View 153 multimedia messages
See documents most recently dialed creating 102
MIDI files 102 numbers list 38 deleting 109, 110
miniSD cards 197 moving displaying 107
mirror 6, 134 documents to folders 173, downloading 105, 110
Missed call option 55 191 forwarding 107
MMS files 144 files to expansion cards internal memory and 250
MMS messaging 101, 256 142, 146, 199, 200 opening 106
mobile accounts. See information 173, 185, 200 overview 99
accounts pictures and videos 139 phone numbers in 39
Mobile Device component speed-dial buttons 50 playing 106–107
(Windows) 256 text 171 previewing 104
Mobile Device folder 73, 193 workbooks 185 receiving 105
Mobile Device icon 257 moving around the screen replying to 107
mobile devices 196, 229 17–19 requirements for 1
mobile networks 235 moving through web pages saving 107
mobile phone numbers 151 118 sending 103, 104, 108
mobile phones. See wireless MP3 files 142 setting options for 104
phones MP4 files 142 sorting 109
Mobile to Market certificates MPEG files 138 troubleshooting 237
191 MPEG4 files 102 Multimedia Messaging
Mobile-Based Device icon MSN Hotmail 113 System. See MMS
194 MSN Messenger 113 messaging
Mode tab 125 multi-connector 5 multiple recipients 102
Modem tab 225 multi-line fields 18 music 39, 142, 144, 206
ModemLink application 128 multimedia features 99, 131 See also media files
modems 127 multimedia file types 138 music files 242
Modify Sheets command multimedia files 138, 250 Mute command 43
182, 186 My Device folder 190

292 INDEX
My Device library 145 network settings 61, 112 notifications
My Documents folder 189, Network tab 62, 147 changing event 207
190, 231 networks closing 106
My Pictures folder 133, 135 changing 62 displaying 56
My Playlists category 145 connecting to 62 downloading sounds for
My Storage Card library 145 logging in to 221 54
My Text command 91 troubleshooting 235–238 enabling or disabling 208
My Text phrases 91 New Account command 89 phone calls and 59
My Windows Mobile-Based New Appointment command previewing sounds for 56
Device icon 194 154, 155 receiving messages and
New MMS command 103 105, 106, 111
N
New Partnership option 125 receiving phone calls and
names 30, 259 New Sound command 207 45
naming New Speed Dial command receiving transmissions
document files 171, 173 48 and 127
expansion cards 201 notes receiving voicemail 41
folders 173 adding 152, 160 setting ringtones for 54
groups of pictures 137 creating 161, 163 setting system sounds for
speed-dial buttons 48 removing 163 207
templates 170, 178 saving 163, 164 silencing sounds for 206
workbooks 185 Notes application 161–164 troubleshooting 237
worksheets 181, 182 Notes icon 161 Notifications check box 207
navigating the screen 17–19 Notes list 163 Notifications tab 55, 207
navigating web pages 118 Notes tab 152, 218 Now Playing playlist 145,
navigator. See 5-way notification options 106, 111, 146
navigator 207 Now Playing screen 146
navigator buttons 17, 19 notification screens. See number format settings 209
negative numbers 209 notifications number pad 12
network protocols 147 Notification tab 112 number sign symbol 209

INDEX 293
Number tab 209 email applications 247 Options screen (Internet
numbered lists 172 File Explorer 190 Explorer) 122, 123
numbers items in folders 190 Options screen (messaging)
See also phone numbers menus 20, 22 96, 110
entering 24, 25 multimedia messages 106 Options tab 205, 213, 218
formatting 176, 180 on-device documentation organizer features 34, 149
pasting into Calculator 202 253 orientation (screen) 210
Outlook folders 241 orientation (slides) 175
O Phone Settings screen 13 orientation options 210
Off Hold button 42 Picsel PDF Viewer 169 Orientation tab 175
Office Outlook. See Outlook Quick Tour 253 outages 237
Office Word documents. See templates 178 Outbox 109
documents text messages 106 Outlook
offline synchronization 241 Today screen 12, 29 accessing folders for 241
Off-peak times options 80 web pages 117, 119, 122 copying addresses to 241
OK button 5, 29 Wireless Manager 33 downloading messages
One Column option 118 operating system (device) from 92, 93
online address book 94, 95, 234, 259, 269 email client software and
97, 153 operating systems (PCs) 71 246
online support (Palm) 253 operational warnings 263 entering information with
Open URL command 144 Option key 18, 24, 25, 257 71
opening Option Lock icon 25 installing drivers for 230
ActiveSync 73 Option Lock mode 25 synchronizing with 77, 95
alternate characters list 26 options Outlook E-mail screen 89, 91
applications 28, 199, 210 displaying 157 overdue tasks 160
attachments 93 highlighting 18, 19, 23 Override playback options
calculator 201 selecting 22, 23 175
Dial Pad 38 Options screen (ActiveSync) owner information 218
documents 170 83 Owner Information icon 218

294 INDEX
Owner Information screen Paste command 140, 171 personal identification
218 patches 194 numbers (PINs) 61, 216,
patterns in workbooks 176 258
P
Pause playback option 106, personal information 217,
page breaks 170 147 218, 255
paired devices 129 PCS phones. See wireless personal information
paired relationships. See phones managers 241, 257
partnerships PCs. See personal See also PIM applications
pairing. See partnerships computers Personal option 157
Palm (online support) 253 PDF files 169 Personal tab 55
Palm applications 192 PDF Viewer 169 personalizing your device
Palm devices 74, 229 Peak times options 80 203
Paragraph command 172 performance 233, 249 phone
paragraph formatting 172 Personal Address Book 241 See also phone calls;
partial battery icon 10 personal computers phone numbers; device
partnerships 125, 238, 257 connecting to 71, 74 adjusting volume 13, 56
passkeys 53, 126 enabling dial-up advanced features 42–48
Password tab 217 networking for 128 answering 39, 45
Password type list 217 installing from 193 customizing 54–62
passwords reinstalling desktop dialing 12, 34–37, 38, 49
call-blocking and 58 software on 229 disabling touch-sensitive
corporate email accounts synchronizing with 71, 82, feature for 215
and 78 83 hanging up 13, 43
entering 78, 89, 217 system requirements 71 network settings for 61
forgetting or losing 217 viewing videos and ringtones for 54, 56
locking device and 215, pictures on 141 running applications and
217 personal events 157 43
saving 89 selecting wireless band for
spreadsheets and 176 60

INDEX 295
silencing ringer 40 phone numbers highlighting in 18, 23
specifications for 269 See also phone; phone scrolling through 18
waking up screen for 43 calls selecting items in 20, 23
phone calls assigning to speed-dial Picsel PDF Viewer 169
See also phone; phone buttons 48 picture files 102, 141
numbers copying 37, 39, 122 picture formats 138
adding a second 44 entering 12, 34, 37, 38 Picture Speed Dial button 48
blocking 58 entering extra digits with picture speed-dial buttons
ending 13, 43 49 36, 48
forwarding 47 locating device 13 pictures
hands-free devices and missing from Phone adding as backgrounds
50, 54 Settings screen 14 140, 205
making 12, 34, 38, 42, redialing most recent 38 adding as screensaver 136
107 saving 44 adding sounds to 104
placing on hold 42 selecting 20 adding to messages 103
receiving 39, 42 Phone Off message 33, 257 adjusting resolution of
receiving notifications for Phone Settings screen 13, 134, 141
59 14, 57, 58, 216 creating caller ID 151
restricting 61 phone status icons 62 default resolution settings
sending to voicemail 39 Phone tab 57, 58 for 248
setting up conference 46 Phone/Send button 5, 13, deleting 141
troubleshooting 237, 251 35, 257 downloading 138
Phone dialog box 39 Phone/Send icon 34 editing 140
phone headset 50–51 phone-off icon 11, 33 hiding on web pages 118
See also headsets photo albums 138 naming groups of 137
Phone icon 216 photos. See pictures previewing 134, 248
phone lock feature 214 pick lists receiving 133
accessing 22 saving 137
exiting 23 sending 139

296 INDEX
setting default size 137 playlists 142, 143, 145 sounds 56, 208
storing 250 plug-ins 117, 205 videos 135
synchronizing 141 Pocket MSN 113 priority levels 105, 160
taking 133–134, 248 POP accounts 88 Priority list 91
viewing 133, 138, 141 pop-up menus 22 privacy mode 105, 112
Pictures & Videos application port numbers 226 private events 157
136, 138–142 portable radio. See radio Private option 157
PIM applications 255, 257 ports. See IR port; USB ports processor 269
PIMs 230, 241, 257 Power icon 223 Program Buttons tab 211
PIN unlock key 258 Power screen 223 Program Files folder 200
PINs 61, 216, 258 Power/End button 5, 33 Programs check box 207
Play button 143 PowerPoint files 165 Programs screen 28
Play Slide Show command PowerPoint Mobile programs. See applications;
138 application 174–176 software
Play Sound box 55 PowerPoint Mobile icon 175 Prompt if device unused for
Play sound check box 208 precautions 267 check box 217
Play Sound list 220 preferences 111, 203 Properties command 119
playback icons 49 See also customizing protected spreadsheets 176
playback options 146, 175 preinstalled applications 194, protecting
Playback screen 146, 147 271 information 214–218
Playback tab 146, 175 presentations 174, 175 Treo device 214
playing See also PowerPoint proxy servers 226
media files 143 Mobile PSW files 169
multimedia messages Preview Message command PUK (PIN unlock key) 258
106–107 104 punctuation marks 25, 27
presentations 174, 176 Preview Mode (camera) 248 Purge command 109
sounds 137 previewing Purge screen 109
voice notes 162 multimedia messages 104 push technology 76
voicemail messages 42 pictures 134, 248

INDEX 297
Q recently-viewed web pages reminders
QCELP files 102 122 adding 154, 160
Quality command 135 rechargeable battery. See events and 158
Quick Keys 36, 48 battery system alarms and 220
Quick Tour 253 recipients, sending to tasks and 161
Quick Tour icon 253 multiple 102 turning on and off 207
QuickTime Player 142 Record button action option remote access servers 224
quitting applications 28, 222 164 remote files 225
recording Remove Programs icon 194,
R sounds 207 196
radio 263, 269 videos 135 Remove Programs list 194
radio frequency emissions voice notes 214 Remove Programs screen
261, 264 Recording icon 162 194, 196
RAS connections 224 recording toolbar 162 Remove Split command 178
reassigning buttons 211 records (data) 196 removing
Receive all incoming beams recurring appointments. See applications 194, 250
check box 197 repeating appointments battery 231, 232
receiving redialing phone numbers 38 battery door 8
attachments 93 redirector (websites) 247 Bluetooth connections
beamed information 197 Refresh command 119 127
email 92, 245 refreshing web pages 118, certificates 221
meeting requests 94 247 contacts 152
multimedia messages Region tab 209 directory services 95
102, 105, 110 regional settings 209, 219 documents 174
pictures 133 Regional Settings icon 209 email accounts 90
text messages 101, 105, Regional Settings screen 209 events 158
237 reinstalling software or expansion cards 198
videos 133 applications 229, 231 favorites 120
Receiving Data message 197 Reminder option 154 files 191, 250

298 INDEX
items from folders 190 Replace All button 171, 184 Return key 24
items from libraries 145 Replace button 171, 184 reverse type 20
items from playlists 146 Replace text as you type Revert to Saved command
messages 97, 109, 110 check box 213 141
notes 163 replacing revision marks 169
partnerships 127, 238 information 184 RF emissions 261, 264
pictures 141 text 170 RF Safety Statement 261
speed-dial buttons 50 the battery 232–233 right action key 20
tasks 161 Request Delivery/Read right-click menus. See
text 20 Receipt check box 105 shortcut menus
web files 123 Require PIN when phone is Ringer switch 7, 206
workbooks 186 used check box 216 ringer volume 56
worksheets 186 reset button 6, 230 ringer, silencing 40
Rename command 201 resets 217, 230–232, 235 ringtone files 102
Rename/Move command caution for 231 ringtone managers 249
170, 173, 185, 200 resizing text 119 ringtones
renaming resolution (camera) 248 assigning to contacts 49,
documents 173 resolution (screen) 234, 270 56, 139, 152
expansion cards 201 Resolution command 134, creating video 139
items in folders 190 248 downloading 54
workbooks 185 restarting Treo device. See previewing 56
worksheets 182 resets selecting 54
Repeat check box 208 restoring roaming 80, 242
Repeat command 144 backups 232, 243 Roaming option 55
repeat patterns 155 information 231, 232 rotating pictures 136, 140
repeating appointments 155 sound settings 206 RTF files 168
repeating current song 144 Resume playback option RTSP files 138, 144
repeating sounds 208 106, 147 running multiple applications
repeating tasks 160 retrieving voicemail 41 28

INDEX 299
Running Programs tab 29, pictures and videos 137 changing color themes for
222 text messages 107 205, 210
workbooks 176, 177, 186 changing orientation 210
S
Schedule command 80 disabling touch-sensitivity
Safety Statement (FCC) 261 Schedule screen 80 for 214
Save As command 121, 171 scheduled syncs 242, 245 locking 215
Save Image command 121 schedules moving around on 17–19
Save links… option 123 adding items to 154, 155, scrolling in 18–19, 214
Save password check box 156, 159 selecting items on 20
78, 89 managing 154–158 setting backgrounds for
Save to Contact Ring Tone organizing events for 157 140, 205
command 139 removing events 158 setting delays for 34
Save to Contacts command removing tasks 161 specifications for 270
44 sorting tasks on 160 troubleshooting 209, 234
Save to list 199 unavailable time on 157 turning on or off 33, 34,
Save to option 164 viewing daily 153 223, 255
Save to Template command scheduling synchronization waking up 34, 43
107 79–80 screen fonts 208
Saved folder 92 screen Screen icon 208, 209
saving activating items on 20 screen resolution 234, 270
documents 168, 170, activating wrong features Screen taps check box 207
171, 174 235 Screen view 209
email messages 92 adjusting brightness 208 screens, returning to
files 199 adjusting display 208–210 previous 19
multimedia items 107 aligning 209 screensavers 136
multimedia messages 107 arranging web pages on scroll arrows 19
notes 163, 164, 214 118 scroll bar 19
passwords 89 battery life and 12 Scroll upon reaching the last
phone numbers 44 caring for 6 line check box 214

300 INDEX
scrolling selecting sounds 207
device screen 18–19, 214 applications 28 text messages 40, 101
slides 175 items in folders 191 videos 139
spreadsheets 178 items in lists 23 sensitivity options 157, 160
web pages 118, 119 items on screen 19, 20 Sent folder 97, 109
SD expansion cards 197 menu items 21, 22 servers, troubleshooting
SDP files 144 options in lists 20, 22, 23 243, 244, 246
SDP Streaming files 138 speed-dial entries 30 See also Exchange
Search button 190 tabs 18 Servers
Search dialog box 189 web links 19, 119 service contracts 1
Search for list 189, 190 self-portrait mirror 6, 134 service providers 224, 236,
Search icon 189 Send Link via E-mail 245
search results list 189, 190 command 119 Services tab 47, 58, 59, 61
searching Send meeting requests via Set as Hands-Free command
contacts list 36 option 159 238
documents 170 Send outgoing items… Set as Today Background
spreadsheets 184 check box 80 command 140
web pages 117 Send Sound command 207 Set reminders for new items
searching for files 189, 190 Send via E-Mail command option 158, 161
searching for information 195 Set up my proxy server
171, 184, 189–190 Send/Receive command 93 option 226
searching for signal 12 sending setting alarm clock 220
secure websites 247 copyrighted items 139 settings. See options
security 126, 214–218, 221 email 92, 98, 119, 245 shaded lightning bolt 10
security certificates 117, 221 meeting requests 95, 156, sharing information 194
security options (web) 123 159 sheet list 178
security software 214 multimedia messages Shift cells options 185
Security tab 123, 216 103, 104, 108 Shift key 24, 25
Select All Text command 121 pictures 139

INDEX 301
Short Messaging Service. signatures 96, 111 compatibility with
See SMS messaging Signatures screen 96, 111 Windows Mobile 234
shortcut menus 22 silencing system sounds 7, included with device 2,
shortcuts 20 206 271
Show alphabetical index silencing the ringer 40 installing 72, 191
option 152 silent alarm 206, 208 purchasing 234
Show contact names only SIM smartcards 7, 9, 216, reinstalling 229, 231
option 153 258 songs. See music
Show half hour slots option Size option 172 Sort By command 161
158 sketching 162 Sort by list 182, 190
Show icons option 159 Skins tab 147 Sort command 109, 182
Show list 138, 199 Slide Show tab 136 sort options 161
Show Options command slide show toolbar 139 sort order 182
175 slide shows 136, 138, 174, sorting
Show Pictures option 118 176 folder items 190
Show start and due dates slide timing option 175 History list items 122
option 161 slider 19 information 182
Show Tasks entry bar option slides 104, 107 messages 109
161 smartcard. See SIM pictures and videos 140
Show time stamps of each smartcards tasks 160
message option 111 smartphone sound clips 102
Show week numbers option getting help with 227 Sound Mode buttons 206
158 troubleshooting 227 sound settings 206, 207
Shuffle command 144 SMS messaging 101, 258 sounds
side button 5 soft resets 230 adding to pictures 104
signal, searching for 12 software changing alarm 220
signal strength 63, 235, 251 See also applications customizing 206
signal-strength icon 33, 224 caution for hard resets and playing 137
Signature box 111 231 previewing 56, 208

302 INDEX
recording 207 spell-checking 91, 173 SSL (Secure Sockets Layer)
selecting event 208 Spelling command 173 117
sending 207 split bar 178 standby mode 134
setting ringtone 54 spreadsheet templates 176, Start button 5, 28
setting system 207 178, 186 Start menu 28, 210, 258
silencing 7, 206 spreadsheets starting
turning off event 208 See also Excel Mobile; data connections 225
Sounds & Notifications workbooks; Excel Mobile 177
screen 55 worksheets Internet Explorer Mobile
Sounds & Notifications accessing 165 117
Settings icon 207 adding charts to 183, 184 Media Player Mobile 143
Sounds & Notifications calculations in 179–180 PowerPoint Mobile 175
Settings screen 207 changing order of Word Mobile 170
Sounds tab 207 worksheets 181 static electricity 266
Space key 24 creating 176 status icons 62, 109
speaker 6, 142 defining filters for 183 stereo headphones 142
speakerphone 42, 251, 264 deleting elements in 185 Still image compression level
Speakerphone command 42 display options for 178– list 137
special characters 27 179 Still Mode command 134
special characters. See entering data in 177, 180 Stop command 144
alternate characters; formatting 176, 181–182 stopping playback 144
symbols insertion options for 180 stopping synchronization 83
special occasions 155 scrolling 178 Storage Card folder 194, 201
specifications 269 searching 184 storage card symbol 190
speech-impaired services 57 sending 85 Storage Card tab 200, 222
Speed Dial Options sorting in 182 storage cards. See expansion
command 50 unsupported features for cards
speed-dial buttons 35, 48–50 177 storage space 222, 243
Spell Check command 91 Storage tab 97

INDEX 303
storage temperatures 271 synchronization over Bluetooth
storing backing up information connections 81
applications 250 and 231 over IR ports 82
attachments 93, 97 battery life and 11 playlists 143
device 6 benefits of 65 through USB hubs 240
document files 172 defaults for 67 wirelessly 69, 76, 81, 82,
information 197, 250 defined 258 243
passwords 78 hard resets and 231, 232 with multiple computers
pictures 250 overview 67 82
workbooks 185 preparing for 71 with sync cable 75
streaming 121, 258 scheduling 79–80 with third-party
Streaming Media application setting options for 83 applications 71, 231
144 setting up 77, 81, 82 system alarms 220
Strikethrough option 172 stopping 83 system dates and time 219
stylus 7 troubleshooting 230, 238– system errors 235
submenus 22 244, 246 system locks 215, 217
Suggest words when synchronization software 69, system requirements 71,
entering text check box 71, 72, 241 271
213 synchronizing system settings 219–224
support 253 addresses 241 system sounds 7, 206, 207
Swap button 46, 47 dates and time 219 system warnings 207
Symbol command 179 email 11, 92, 239, 245,
T
symbols 26, 27, 49, 179 246
Sync button 80 information 68, 69, 71, tables in documents 169
sync cable 71, 74, 75 239 tabs 18
sync conflicts 78 manually 80 taking pictures 133–134, 248
sync schedules 242, 245 media files 143 tapping 17, 20, 209
multimedia files 141 tapping sounds 207
offline 241 task categories 160, 161

304 INDEX
Task tab 160 notes 163, 164 text files 221
tasks spreadsheets 176, 178, text messages
adding notes to 160 186 creating 101
completing 160 text messages 107 deleting 109, 110
creating 159 Templates folder 170, 178 forwarding 107
customizing 161 tentative appointments 154 links in 108
deleting 161 text opening 106
displaying 160, 161 aligning 172 overview 99
filtering 160 changing 170 phone calls and 43
filtering and sorting 160 copying 121 phone numbers in 39
marking as sensitive 160 deleting 20 receiving 105, 237
setting due dates for 160 entering 24, 25, 213, 214 replying to 107
setting reminders for 160, finding and replacing 170, saving 107
161 171, 213 sending 40, 101
Tasks application 159–161 formatting 172 setting options for 104
Tasks entry bar 159, 161 highlighting 20, 172 sorting 109
Tasks icon 159 moving or copying 171 troubleshooting 237
Tasks list 160 resizing 119, 208 Text Size tab 208
Tasks tab (Connections) 225, selecting 20 Text Speed Dial button 48
226 spell-checking 91, 173 text speed-dial buttons 36,
TDD devices 57, 263 word-processing features 48
technical support 253 for 169 text telephone devices. See
telecommunications devices text captions 104 TTY devices
for impaired. See TTY text fields themes 205, 210
devices moving to 18 third-party applications
temperature range 271 opening drop-down lists in accessing Outlook folders
templates 23 and 241
documents 170, 174 removing text in 20 caution for hard resets and
multimedia messages 107 scrolling through 18 231

INDEX 305
compatibility with 191 color themes for 210 trusted pairs. See
deleting 250 components of 30 partnerships
getting help with 249 customizing 140, 205 TTY devices 57, 263
installing 192, 249, 250 dialing from 34, 35, 37, 38 TTY/TDD options 57
navigator and 17, 250 overview 29 Turn on Bluetooth check box
previewing pictures and recovering settings for 52, 125
248 243 turning on or off
reinstalling 229, 231 retrieving voicemail from alarms 207, 220
screen resolution and 234 41 caller IDs 59
synchronizing with 71, Today Settings screen 205 Caps Lock 25
231 top view (device) 7 device 33, 262
troubleshooting 192, 234, touchscreen. See screen event sounds 208
249–250 touchscreen lockout 214, keyboard backlight 24
third-party vendors 71 215 Keyguard 215
Thumbnail View 134, 135 touch-sensitive feature 214 Option Lock 25
Thumbnails button 135 transactions 247 reminders 207
TIF files 138 transferring Ringer switch 206
time format settings 209 applications 200 screen 33, 34, 223
time system settings 219 files 142, 146, 199, 200 wireless services 11
Time tab 209, 219 information 65, 229 TXT files 168
time units 155 transition effects (slides) 175 Typing mode 163
time zones 219, 242 transmission delays 237
U
Timer 134 Transparency level list 140
tips 1 troubleshooting 227, 253 UMTS services 259
Today icon 205 Trusted Device list 124, 125 unauthorized users 214, 221
Today screen trusted devices 124, 125, unavailable time slots 157
accessing 12, 29 127 Underline option 172
accessing Dial Pad from See also partnerships underlining text 169, 172
38 Undo command 141

306 INDEX
Unfreeze Panes option 179 usernames 259 synchronizing 141
Unknown Caller option 55 viewing 133, 138, 141
V
unlocking View By command 152
device 217 Validity Period list 105 View command 118, 153
SIM smartcards 216 vCal attachments 246 View Recording Toolbar
spreadsheet rows and vCard attachments 104, 246 command 162
columns 179 Vibrate when… check boxes viewing
unread messages 109 56, 208 alternate characters 26
unretrieved voicemail 41 vibrating alarm 206, 208 animated images 142
unsafe areas 262 video albums 138 applications on device 28
untimed events 155, 156 video file types 138 appointments 153
Update Library command video files 102, 141, 242 calendar 153
145 Video Mode command 135 contacts 37, 152
updating information 65, 71 video options 147 current connection 225
upgrades 229 video ringtones 133, 139 daily schedules 153
uppercase letters 25, 214 Video tab 137, 147 events 155, 157
urgent message icon 109 videos folder contents 190
URLs 144, 174 adding sounds 137 memory usage 222
See also web links adding to messages 104 multimedia messages 107
USB connections 128 changing resolution 135 notifications 56, 208
USB controllers 241 defaults for 137 on-device documentation
USB hubs 240 downloading 142 253
USB ports 74, 240 limiting length 137 PDF files 169
USB sync cable 74 previewing 135 pictures 133, 138, 141
Use above settings while receiving 133 power settings 223
roaming check box 80 recording 135 Quick Tour documentation
Use network time zone saving 137 253
check box 220 sending 139 running applications 222
User Guide 253 setting resolution for 248

INDEX 307
space on expansion cards Voicemail icon 41 web files 123
200, 222 voicemail systems 40 web links
tasks 160, 161 volume clearing 123
videos 133, 138, 141 phone 13, 56 internal memory and 250
web pages 117, 118 ringer 56 messages and 108, 119
wireless settings 224 tapping sounds 207 Palm online support 253
virtual private networks. See Volume button 5, 13, 56 selecting 19, 119
VPN connections VPN clients 225, 239 troubleshooting 247
voice captions 104 VPN connections 88, 93, 225 web pages
Voice Command button 212, VPN software 225 accessing 117, 119, 122,
213 247
Voice Command icon 233 W arranging on screen 118
Voice Command screen 212 waking up screen 34, 43 clearing links to 250
Voice Command settings wallpaper 133 copying from 121
212, 233 warnings 207, 263 dialing from 39, 122
voice commands 12, 213 warranty 2 display options for 118
Voice mail option 55 WBMP files 102 downloading items from
voice notes 162, 214 weak signals 235, 251 121, 193
Voice recording format list web addresses 30, 118, 247 hiding images on 118
214 See also web links moving through 118
voice recording formats 214 web browser. See Internet playing media files from
voicemail Explorer Mobile 144
customizing 49, 55 web browsing refreshing 118, 247
receiving notifications for memory consumption and resizing text on 119
41 250 returning to recently
retrieving messages 41 requirements for 1 viewed 122
sending calls to 39, 45 secure sites and 117, 118, scrolling 118, 119
setting up 40 247 searching 117
voicemail buttons 49 troubleshooting 247 security settings for 123

308 INDEX
selecting addresses on wireless connections 115, workbooks
247 124, 128–130 See also Excel Mobile
sending email from 119 wireless coverage 12, 33 application;
setting as home 122 wireless features 11, 115, spreadsheets
viewing 117, 118 224, 249 creating 177
Web search field 117 Wireless Manager 11, 33, deleting 186
websites 224 displaying 178–179
See also web browsing Wireless Manager command moving around in 179
accessing 115 11, 33 naming 185
compatibility with 117 wireless modems 127 organizing 185
connecting to 117, 127 wireless phones 266 replacing information in
ending connections to 226 wireless services 11, 224 184
redirectors and 247 wireless synchronization 69, saving 176, 177, 186
searching over 117 76, 81, 82, 243 searching 184
submitting transactions WMA files 138, 142 setting default template
and 247 WMV files 138, 142 for 186
week numbers 158 Word application 165 worksheet names 177
Week View 153, 158 See also documents worksheets
Week view option 158 Word Completion tab 213 See also spreadsheets;
Windows Media Player 121 word matching 171, 184 workbooks
Windows Mobile devices Word Mobile application 18, adding 181
196, 229 169–174 adjusting column and row
Windows Mobile Getting Word Mobile icon 170 size for 182
Started Disc 2, 191 word-processing features deleting 186
Windows Mobile operating 169 entering defined names in
system 234, 259 workbook list 186 181
Windows Mobile software entering formulas in 179,
192 185
wireless band setting 60 entering functions in 179

INDEX 309
filtering data in 183 renaming 182 Zoom command 119, 170
formatting options for Writing mode 163 zoom icons (presentations)
181–182 175
Y
inserting cells, rows, and Zoom In command 175
columns 180 Year View 154 zoom options 134
moving between 178 zoom settings 177, 178, 214
Z
naming 181
ZIP files 191
removing cells, rows, and
columns 185 zoom buttons (camera) 134

310 INDEX